中考英语复习人教版

中考英语复习人教版

‎2018年中考英语复习资料总汇 ‎（1）名词考点集汇，讲解和训练 一、名词 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1．可数名词和不可数名词的用法； ‎ ‎2．名词所有格的构成及用法；‎ ‎3．近义名词的辨析。‎ ‎【名师点睛】‎ 一、名词的数 ‎ ‎1．单数和复数 ‎　 可数名词有单数和复数两种形式。复数形式通常是在单数形式后加词尾“-s”构成，其主要变法如下：‎ ‎　（1）一般情况在词尾加-s，例如：book→books，girl→girls，boy→boys，pen→pens,doctor→doctors, boy→boys。‎ ‎　（2）以s，x，ch，sh，结尾的词加-es，例如：bus→buses，class→classes，box→boxes，watch→watches，brush→brushes。 ‎ ‎　（3）以ce, se, ze,（d）ge结尾的名词加s，例如：orange—oranges。‎ ‎　（4）以辅音母加y结尾的词变“y”为“i”再加-es,例如：city→cities, factory→factories, country→countries, family→families。但要注意的是以元音字母加y结尾的名词的复数形式只加s，如：boy→boys, day→days。‎ ‎　（5）以o结尾的词多数都加-es。例如:hero→heroes，potato→potatoes，tomato→tomatoes,但词末为两个元音字母的词只加-s。例如：zoo→zoos，radio→radios，还有某些外来词也只加-s，例如：photo→photos，piano→pianos。‎ ‎　（6）以f或fe结尾的词，多数变f为v再加-es，例如：knife→knives，leaf→leaves, half→halves。‎ ‎　　复数词尾s（或es）的读音方法如下表所示。‎ ‎　　复数词尾s（或es）的读音方法 情　况 ‎ 读法 ‎ 例　词 ‎ 在[p][t][k][f]等清辅音后 ‎ ‎[s] ‎ cups, hats, cakes ‎ 在[s][z][t][][F]等音后 ‎ ‎[iz] ‎ glasses, pages, oranges, buses, watches,faces ‎ 在[b][d][‎ ‎ ][v]等浊辅音后 ‎ ‎[z] ‎ beds, dogs, cities, knives ‎ ‎　（7）少数名词有不规则的复数形式，例如：man→men，woman→women，tooth→teeth，foot→feet，child→children，mouse→mice。‎ ‎　　【注意】与man和woman构成的合成词，其复数形式也是-men和-women。例如：an Englishman，two Englishmen。但German不是合成词，故复数形式为 Germans；man, woman等作定语时，它的单复数以其所修饰的名词的单复数而定，如：men　workers， women teachers。‎ ‎　　有个别名词单复数一样，例如：Chinese，Japanese，sheep，deer，fish等。但当fish表示不同种类的鱼时，可以加复数词尾。‎ ‎　（8）单数形式但其意为复数的名词有：people, police等。‎ ‎　（9）数词+名词作定语时，这个名词一般保留单数形式，中间加连字符。例如：ten-minutes’ walk, an 8-year-old girl, a ten-mile walk。‎ ‎　（10）还有些名词仅有复数形式，如：trousers，clothes，chopsticks，glasses，goods，ashes，scissors，compasses。‎ ‎　（11）只用作单数的复数形式的名词有：‎ ‎　　科学名词：physics, mathematics/maths 　　游戏名称：bowls 　　专有名词：the United States, Niagara Falls 　　其他名词：news, falls ‎2．不可数名词“量”的表示方法 ‎　　在英语中，不可数名词如果要表示“量”的概念，可以用以下两种方法：‎ ‎　（1）用much, a little, a lot of/lots of, some, any等表示多少，例如：‎ ‎　　The rich man has a lot of money． 　　There is some milk in the bottle． 　　Is there any water in the glass？ 　　I don't like winter because there's too much snow and ice．‎ ‎　（2）用a piece of 这类定语，例如：‎ ‎　　a piece of paper a piece of wood a piece of bread ‎ ‎　　a bottle of orange a glass of water（milk） a cup of tea ‎ ‎　　a cup of tea a bag of rice three bags of rice 　　如果要表示“两杯茶”、“四张纸”这类概念时，在容器后加复数，例如： 　　two cups of tea 　　four pieces of paper 　　three glasses of water ‎　　不可数名词也可用a lot of, lots of, some, any, much等来修饰。‎ 二、名词的所有格 ‎ ‎　　名词所有格，用来表示人或物的所有，以及领属关系。‎ ‎1. 表示有生命的名词的所有格其单数形式是加 's,其复数形式是s'，例如：a student's room, students' rooms, father's shoes。‎ ‎2. 如其结尾不是s的复数形式仍加 's，如：Children's Day。‎ ‎3. 在表示时间、距离、长度、重量、价格、世界、国家等名词的所有格要用 's，例如：a twenty minutes' walk，ten miles' journey，a boat's length，two pounds' weight, ten dollars' worth。‎ ‎4. 无生命名词的所有格则必须用of结构，例如：a map of China，the end of this term，the capital of our country, the color of the flowers。‎ ‎5. 双重所有格，例如：a friend of my father's。‎ ‎【注意】‎ ‎　　如果两个名词并列，并且分别有 's，则表示“分别有”，例如：John's and Mary's rooms（约翰和玛丽各有一间，共两间）；Tom's and Mary's bikes（两人各自的自行车）。‎ ‎　　两个名词并列，只有一个's，则表示“共有”，例如：John and Mary's room（约翰和玛丽共有一间）；Tom and Mary's mother（即Tom与Mary是兄妹）。‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1.（2004年上海徐汇区中考试题）‎ ‎ These _________ have saved many children’s lives.‎ ‎ A. woman doctors B. women doctor ‎ C. women doctors D. woman doctor ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是名词作定语时的变化。woman 作定语时要和被修饰的名词保持数的一致。‎ ‎2. (2004年河北省中考试题)‎ This is _________ bedroom. The twin sisters like it very much.‎ ‎ A. Anne and Jane B. Anne’s and Jane’s ‎ C. Anne’s and Jane D. Anne and Jane’s ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是并列名词的所有格。两人共有一个房间时，只在后面的名词后加’s。‎ ‎3. (2004年吉林省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Are there any ________ on the farm?‎ ‎ ---Yes, there are some.‎ ‎ A. horse B. duck C. chicken D. sheep ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是特殊名词的复数形式。从谓语动词来判断，主语应该是复数名词。只有sheep可用作复数名词。‎ ‎4. (2004年佛山市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---What would you like to drink, ________ or orange?‎ ‎ ---Orange, please.‎ ‎ A. hamburger B. chip C. tea ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是名词的类别。三种东西中只有tea能喝。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1．--- Where have you been, Tim?‎ ‎　 --- I’ve been to ______.‎ ‎　A. the Henry house      B. the Henry family ‎ ‎　C. The Henry’s home    D. Henry’s ‎2．In England, if ____ is in the middle of the day, the evening meal is called supper.‎ ‎　A. food   B. lunch   C. breakfast   D. dinner ‎3．You looked for it twice, but you haven’t found it. Why not try ____ .‎ ‎　A. three times   B. a third time   C. the third time   D. once ‎4．--- They are thirsty. Will you please give them ______ ?‎ ‎　 --- Certainly.‎ ‎　A. some bottles of waters   B. some bottles of water ‎　C. some bottle of water     D. some bottle of waters ‎5．Mike hurt one of his ______ in the accident yesterday.‎ ‎　A. tooth   B. feet   C. hand   D. ear ‎6．There is some _______ on the plate.‎ ‎　A. cakes   B. meat   C. potato   D. pears ‎7．In England, the last name is the  _______ .‎ ‎　A. family name   B. middle   C. given name   D. full name ‎8．The are going to fly _______ to Beijing.‎ ‎　A. Germen   B. Germany   C. Germanys   D. Germans ‎9．The______ has two _______ .‎ ‎　A. boys; watches   B. boy; watch   C. boy; watches   D. boys; watch ‎10．The little baby has two _______ already.‎ ‎　A. tooth   B. tooths   C. teeth   D. teeths ‎11．What’s your _______ for being late again?‎ ‎　A. idea   B. key   C. excuse   D. news ‎12．--- It’s dangerous here. We’d better go out quickly.‎ ‎　　--- But I think we should let _______ go out first.‎ ‎　A. woman and children   B. women and child ‎　C. woman and child      D. women and children ‎13．--- You can see Mr. Smith if there is a sign “_______ ”on the door of his shop.‎ ‎　　--- Thanks.‎ ‎　A.ENTRANCE       B.BUSINESS HOURS ‎ ‎　C.THIS SIDE UP   D.NO SMOKING ‎14．Are they going to have a picnic on _______ ?‎ ‎　A. Children’s Day    B. Childrens’s Day ‎ ‎　C. Childrens Day      D. Children Day ‎15．Where are the students? Are they in _______ ?‎ ‎　A. the Room 406   B. Room 406   C. the 406 Room   D. 406 Room 二. 根据下列句子的情景及所给汉语注释，写出所缺单词。‎ ‎1. We’ve got a lot of new ________(杂志) in our school library.‎ ‎2. Please turn to another _______（频道）, I don’t like this show.‎ ‎3. Yesterday the _________(航班) to London was put off because of the bad weather.‎ ‎.4. Autumn is my favourite (季节) ‎ ‎5. ---How many _______(小刀) do you have?‎ ‎ ---Three.‎ ‎6. __________ are widely used in the modern world.  ‎ ‎7. June 1st is __________(儿童) Day.‎ ‎8. Mary, would you please tell me your new ________(地址) so that I can write to you.‎ ‎9. ---Does this piece of ______(音乐) sound nice?‎ ‎ ---Yes. It’s wonderful!‎ ‎10. May 12th is the International _______(护士) Day. Let’s say “ Thanks” to them for their work.‎ 三. 根据句意和所给首字母写出所缺的单词。‎ ‎1. “What’s your n_______?”‎ ‎ “Li Lei.”‎ ‎2. How many d_______ does your uncle have?‎ ‎3. Please close the w______. It’s cold outside.‎ ‎4. If you want study English well, you must pay attention to your p________.‎ ‎5. A computer is one of the greatest i_________ in the world.‎ ‎6. Zhang Hui is very excited. He will go to Japan with his p_______ during the Spring Festival. ‎ ‎7. At the a______ of seven, the lonely girl had to work to make living.‎ ‎8. It’s only about an h_____ flight from Qingdao to Beijing by air.‎ ‎9. Health is more important to me than m_______.‎ ‎10. Be careful! It’s d__________ to run across the street now.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一．1.D 2.B 3.B 4.B 5.B  6.B 7.A 8.D 9.C 10.C 11.C 12.D 13.B 14.A 15.B ‎ 二．1.magazines 2.Channel 3. flight 4.season 5. knives 6. Computers 7. Children’s 8. address 9. music 10. Nurses’‎ 三．1.name 2.daughters 3. window 4. pronunciation 5. inventions 6.parents 7. age 8. hour’s 9. money 10. dangerous ‎（2）形容词、副词考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 二、形容词和副词 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1. 形容词的用法；‎ ‎2. 副词的用法；‎ ‎3. 形容词和副词原级、比较级、最高级的用法；‎ ‎4. 形容词和副词在句中的区别和位置。‎ ‎【名师点睛】‎ ‎1. 形容词的用法 ‎ ‎(1) 形容词在句中作定语, 表语, 宾语补足语。 例如：‎ ‎ Our country is a beautiful country. （作定语）‎ ‎ The fish went bad. （作表语）‎ We keep our classroom clean and tidy. （作宾语补足语）‎ ‎(2) 形容词修饰something, anything, nothing, everything等不定代词时,形容词放在名词后面。 ‎ ‎　 I have something important to tell you. ‎ ‎　 Is there anything interesting in the film. ‎ ‎(3) 用 and 或 or 连接起来的两个形容词作定语时一般把它们放在被修饰的名词后面。起进一步解释的作用。 ‎ ‎　 Everybody, man and woman, old and young, should attend the meeting. ‎ ‎　 You can take any box away, big or small. ‎ ‎(4) the＋形容词表示一类人或物 ‎ The rich should help the poor.‎ ‎2. 副词的用法 ‎(1) 副词在句中可作状语,表语和定语。 ‎ He studies very hard. （作状语）‎ Life here is full of joy. （作定语）‎ ‎ When will you be back? （作表语）‎ ‎ 副词按其用途和含义可分为下面五类：‎ ‎1)时间副词 时间副词通常用来表示动作的时间。常见的时间副词有：now today, tomorrow, yesterday, before, late, early, never, seldom, sometimes, often, usually, always等。例如：‎ He often comes to school late.‎ What are we going to do tomorrow?‎ He is never been to Beijing.‎ ‎2)地点副词 地点副词通常用来表示动作发生的地点。常见的地点副词有：here, there, inside, outside, home, upstairs, downstairs, anywhere, everywhere, nowhere, somewhere, down, up, off, on, in, out等。例如：‎ I met an old friend of mine on my way home.‎ He went upstairs.‎ Put down your name here.‎ ‎3)方式副词 方式副词一般都是回答“怎样的？”这类问题的，其中绝大部分都是由一个形容词加词尾-ly构成的, 有少数方式副词不带词尾-ly, 它们与形容词同形。常见的方式副词有：anxiously, badly, bravely, calmly, carefully, proudly, rapidly, suddenly, successfully, angrily, happily, slowly, warmly, well, fast, slow, quick, hard, alone, high, straight, wide等。例如：‎ The old man walked home slowly.‎ Please listen to the teacher carefully.‎ The birds are flying high.‎ He runs very fast.‎ ‎4)程度副词 程度副词多数用来修饰形容词和副词，有少数用来修饰动词或介词短语。常见的程度副词有：much, (a) little, a bit, very, so, too, enough, quite, rather, pretty, greatly, completely, nearly, almost, deeply, hardly, partly等。例如：‎ Her pronunciation is very good.‎ She sings quite well.‎ I can hardly agree with you.‎ ‎5)疑问副词是用来引导特殊疑问句的副词。常见的疑问副词有：how, when, where, why等。例如：‎ How are you getting along with your studies?‎ Where were you yesterday?‎ Why did you do that?‎ ‎(2)副词在句中的位置 ‎1)多数副词作状语时放在动词之后。如果动词带有宾语，则放在宾语之后。例如：‎ Mr Smith works very hard.‎ She speaks English well.‎ ‎2)频度副词作状语时，通常放在行为动词之前，情态动词，助动词和be动词之后。例如：‎ He usually gets up early.‎ I’ve never heard him singing.‎ She is seldom ill.‎ ‎3)程度副词一般放在所修饰的形容词和副词的前面, 但enough作副词用时，通常放在被修饰词的后面。例如：‎ It is a rather difficult job.‎ He runs very fast.‎ He didn’t work hard enough.‎ ‎4)副词作定语时，一般放在被修饰的名词之后。例如：‎ On my way home, I met my uncle.‎ The students there have a lot time to do their own research work.‎ ‎(3)部分常用副词的用法 ‎1) very, much 这两个副词都可表示“很”，但用法不同。Very用来修饰形容词和副词的原级，而much用来修饰形容词和副词的比较级。例如：‎ She is a very nice girl I’m feeling much better now.‎ Much可以修饰动词，而very则不能。例如：‎ I don’t like the idea much.‎ They did not talk much.‎ ‎2) too, either 这两个副词都表示“也”，但too用于肯定句，either用于否定句。例如：‎ She can dance, and I can dance, too.‎ I haven’t read the book and my brother hasn’t either.‎ ‎3) already, yet already一般用于语肯定句，yet一般用于否定句。例如：‎ He has already left.‎ Have you heard from him yet?‎ He hasn’t answered yet.‎ ‎4) so, neither so和neither都可用于倒装句， 但so表示肯定，neither表示否定。‎ 例如：‎ My brother likes football and so do I.‎ My brother doesn’t like dancing and neither do I.‎ ‎3. 形容词和副词的比较级和最高级 ‎(1) 两个人或事物的比较时（不一定每一方只有一个人或一个事物），用比较 级。‎ ‎　　 Our teacher is taller than we are. ‎ ‎　　 The boys in her class are taller than the boys in your class.‎ ‎(2) most 同形容词连用而不用 the,表示 "极,很,非常, 十分"。 ‎ ‎　　 It's most dangerous to be here. ‎ ‎　　 在这儿太危险。 ‎ ‎(3) "The+形容词比较级..., the+形容词比较级..."表示 " 越... 就越..."。 ‎ ‎　　 The more you study, the more you know. ‎ ‎　(4) " 形容词比较级 + and + 形容词比较级 ", 表示 " 越来越... "。 ‎ ‎　　 It's getting hotter and hotter. ‎ ‎　(5) 主语+谓语(系动词)+as+形容词原形+as+从句。表示两者对比相同。 ‎ ‎　　 This box is as big as mine. ‎ ‎　(6) the + 形容词 表示某种人。 ‎ ‎　　 He always helps the poor. ‎ ‎　(7) 形容词和副词最高级用于三个或三个以上的人和物进行比较。 ‎ ‎　　 Shanghai is one of the biggest cities in China.‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (2004年北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Which is ________, the sun, the moon or the earth?‎ ‎ ---Of course the moon is.‎ ‎ A. small B. smaller C. smallest D. the smallest ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是形容词的比较等级的用法。因为是 太阳，地球和月亮三者进行比较，选用形容词的最高级，而且最高级之前要加定冠词the。所以选D。‎ ‎2. (2004年上海徐汇区中考试题)‎ ‎ He has made _______ progress this term than before.‎ ‎ A. little B. less C. fewer D. much ‎ 答案 B。该题考查的是形容词比较等级的用法。因为是现在和过去进行比较，所以要用比较级，又因为是修饰不可数名词，只能用less, 而不能用fewer。‎ ‎3. (2004年江西省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---What delicious cakes!‎ ‎ ---They would taste _______ with butter.‎ ‎ A. good B. better C. bad D. worse ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是形容词的比较等级。答话人的意思应该是“如果加上点黄油，这些蛋糕会更好吃。”这里就有一种比较：加黄油和不加黄油。既然是比较，就要用比较级。因为这里讲的是好吃和更好吃，所以C,D要舍去，而选better。‎ ‎4. (2004年河北省中考试题)‎ ‎ Bob never does his homework ________ Mary. He makes lots of mistakes.‎ ‎ A. so careful as B. as carefully as C. carefully as D. as careful as ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是形容词和副词的用法区别。因为该词修饰的是动作“做家庭作业”，所以要用副词。又因为表示一方不如另一方要用句型“not as+副词原级+as”，所以只能选B。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1．There are many young trees on        sides of the road.‎ ‎　 A. every            　B. each             　C. both             　D. all ‎2．--- It’s so cold today.‎ ‎　 --- Yes, it’s        than it was yesterday.‎ ‎　 A. more cold        　B. more colder          　C. much colder      　D. cold ‎3．Little Tom has        friends, so he often plays alone.‎ ‎　　A. more　         B. a little　             C. many             　D. few ‎4．She isn’t so        at maths as you are.‎ ‎　 A. well　         B. good　             C. better　               D. best ‎5．Peter writes        of the three.‎ ‎　 A. better　      B. best　                 C. good　             D. well ‎6．He is        enough to carry the heavy box.‎ ‎　 A. stronger　         B. much stronger　   C. strong　          D. the strongest ‎7．I bought        exercise-books with        money.‎ ‎　 A. a few; a few                         　　B. a few; a little    ‎ ‎　 C. a little; a few                          D. a little; a little ‎8．The box is        heavy for the girl        carry.‎ ‎　 A. too; to　          B. to; too　          C. so; that　             D. no; to ‎9．The ice in the lake is about one meter       . It’s strong enough to skate on.‎ ‎　 A. long　         B. high　             C. thick　            D. wide ‎10．Wu Lin ran        faster than the other boys in the sports meeting.‎ ‎　 A. so               　B. much             　C. very             D. too ‎11. Jone looks so _______ today because she has got an “A” in her maths test.‎ ‎ A. happy B. happily C. angry D. angrily ‎12. The smile on my father’s face showed that he was ______ with me.‎ ‎ A. sad B. pleased C. angry D. sorry ‎13. ---Mum, could you buy me a dress like this?‎ ‎ ---Certainly, we can buy ______ one than this, but ______ this.‎ ‎ A. a better; better than B. a worse; as good as ‎ C. a cheaper; as good as D. a more important; good as ‎14. ---This digital camera is really cheap!‎ ‎ ---The ______ the better. I’m short of money, you see.‎ ‎ A. cheap B. cheaper C. expensive D. more expensive ‎15. If you want to learn English well, you must use it as _______ as possible.‎ ‎ A. often B. long C. hard D. soon ‎16. Paul has ______ friends except me, and sometimes he feels lonely.‎ ‎ A. many B. some C. few D. more ‎17. English people _____ use Mr. Before a man’s first name.‎ ‎ A. never B. usually C. often D. sometimes ‎18. ---One more satellite was sent up into space in China in May.‎ ‎ ---Right. The government spoke ______ that.‎ ‎ A. highly for B. high of ‎ C. well of D. highly of ‎19. ---Remember this, children. ______ careful you are, ______ mistakes you will make.‎ ‎ ---We know, Miss Gao.‎ ‎ A. The more; the more B. The fewer; the more ‎ C. The more; the fewer D. The less; the less ‎20. I have ________ to do today.‎ ‎ A. anything important B. something important ‎ C. important nothing D. important something 二. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 ‎1. My purse was stolen on the bus yesterday. __________ (Fortunate), there was no money in it.‎ ‎2. Mobile phones are _________ (wide) used in most of the cities in China.‎ ‎3. He put on his coat and went out ________ (quick).‎ ‎4. She is ______ (good) than Li Ping at swimming.‎ ‎5. A lot Chinese people are _______ (pride) of Yao Ming, a famous basketball star in NBA.‎ ‎6. To our surprise, he suddenly returned on a cold ______ (snow) night.‎ ‎7. Allie asked me ______ (polite) to put the things away.‎ ‎8. It’s snowing hard. You must drive ________(careful).‎ ‎9. The earth we live on is _______ (big) than the moon.‎ ‎10. Hainan is a very large island. It’s the second ________ (large) island in China.‎ 三. 用适当的形容词或副词填空(首字母已给出)‎ ‎1. A large number of mouths must be fed in those less d________ countries.‎ ‎2. That evening Beethoven played the music for the girl as well as u______.‎ ‎3. Hawaii is f_______ its beautiful beaches.‎ ‎4. He often takes an a______ part in the sports meeting and he can get very good results each time.‎ ‎5. The performance was so w_______ that everyone gave a long and loud applause(鼓掌).‎ ‎6. Jiefang Road is the b_____ street in our city.‎ ‎7. She lay a______ for hours thinking over her business.‎ ‎8. I like ball games very much, but my f_______ sport is playing basketball.‎ ‎9. The boy is too l______ . He doesn’t want to do anything.‎ ‎10. The dictionary is very u________ . It will help you a lot.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.C 2.C 3.D 4.B 5.B 6.C 7.B 8.A 9.C 10.B 11.A 12.B 13.C 14.B 15.A 16.C 17.A 18.D 19.C 20.B 二. 1. Fortunately 2. widely 3.quickly 4. better 5. proud 6. snowy 7. politely 8. carefully 9. bigger 10. largest 三. 1. developed 2. usual 3. famous 4. active 5. wonderful 6. busiest 7. awake 8. favourite 9. lazy 10. useful ‎（3）动词考点集汇、讲解和训练 ‎ 三、动词 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1.动词的八种时态的构成及用法；‎ ‎2.动词被动语态的构成及用法；‎ ‎3.非谓语动词的构成及用法；‎ ‎4.近义动词的用法区别。‎ ‎【名师点睛】‎ ‎1.动词的时态 ‎　　英语时态用共有十六种时态，其中常用的有8种，它们是：一般现在时、一般过去时、一般将来时、现在进行时、现在完成时、过去进行时、过去完成时和过去将来时。‎ ‎（1）一般现在时的基本用法 ‎1) 经常性或习惯性的动作，常与表示频度的时间状语连用。‎ ‎　 时间状语： every…, sometimes,　at…, on Sunday ‎　 I leave home for school at 7 every morning.‎ ‎2) 客观真理，客观存在，科学事实。‎ ‎　 The earth moves around the sun.‎ ‎　 Shanghai lies in the east of China.‎ ‎3) 表示格言或警句中。‎ ‎　 Pride goes before a fall.‎ ‎【注意】此用法如果出现在宾语从句中，即使主句是过去时，从句谓语也要用一般现在时。‎ 例：Columbus proved that the earth is round..‎ ‎4) 现在时刻的状态、能力、性格、个性。‎ ‎　 I don't want so much.‎ ‎5) 某些动词如 come, go, move, stop, leave, arrive, be, finish, continue, start 等，在一般现在时句中可用来表示将来肯定会发生的动作。 ‎ ‎　　 The train comes at 3 o'clock. ‎ ‎　 6) 在时间状语从句或条件状语从句中，一般现在时代替一般将来时。 ‎ ‎　　 I'll help you as soon as you have problem. ‎ ‎　　 Tell Xiao Li about it if you meet him. ‎ ‎（2）一般过去时的用法： 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 ‎ ‎　　表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间内所发生的动作或情况，通常一般过去式带有表示动作时间状语的词，词组或从句,如 yesterday, the day before last, last week, two days ago 等,上下文清楚时可以不带时间状语。 ‎ ‎　　I worked in that factory last year. ‎ ‎【注意】‎ ‎1) 过去经常反复发生的动作，也可用used to或would加动词原形来表达，例如：‎ ‎ I used to go fishing on Sundays.‎ ‎ 2) “used to”也可用于表示过去曾经存在过的状态。例如：‎ ‎ This river used to be clean.‎ ‎（3）一般将来时的用法 ‎1）表示将来的动作或状态。例如： ‎ ‎　　 I shall attend the meeting tomorrow. ‎ ‎2）表示将来反复发生的动作或存在的状态。例如：‎ He will go to see his mother every Saturdays.‎ ‎　 3）表示将来的意愿，决心，许诺， 命令等时常用will，征求对方意见，主语是第一人称时，常用shall。‎ ‎　　 I will do my best to catch up with them. ‎ ‎　　 Shall I open the door?‎ ‎　 4）be + going + 动词不定式。也是一种将来时句型，表示打算，计划，最近 或将来要作的某事。 ‎ ‎　　 I am going to Beijing next week. ‎ ‎　 5）be + 动词不定式。表示有职责，义务，可能，约定，意图等。 ‎ ‎　　 There is to be a meeting this afternoon. ‎ ‎　　 We are to meet the guests at the station. ‎ ‎　 6）be about + 动词不定式，表示马上，很快作某事。 ‎ ‎　　 They are about to leave. ‎ ‎（4）现在进行时的用法 ‎ ‎　 1) 现在进行时的用法表示说话者说话时正在发生或者进行的动作， 它注重 现在正在进行的动作，而不管动作从什么时间开始，到什么时间结束。 ‎ ‎　　 What are you doing now? ‎ I am looking for my key. ‎ ‎　 2) 现在进行时表示目前一段时间内正在进行的动作（但说话时这个动作不一定在进行）。 ‎ ‎　　 The students are preparing for the examination. ‎ ‎3) 某些动词的现在进行时可以表示即将发生的动作，这些动词有 arrive, come, leave, start等。 ‎ ‎　　 They are going to Hong Kong tomorrow. ‎ ‎【注意】有些动词一般不可以用于进行时态 ‎①表示状态的动词，尤其是静态动词，如：be, have ‎②表示认识、知觉和情感的动词，如：know, think, hear, find, see, like, want, wish, prefer等。‎ ‎（5）现在完成时的用法 ‎ ‎　 1) 现在完成时表示在说话之前已经完成或刚完成的动作。 ‎ ‎　　 I have bought a ten-speed bicycle. ‎ ‎　　 They have cleaned the classroom. ‎ ‎　 2) 现在完成时表示动作从过去开始持续到现在，或者还有可能持续下去的动作或状态。 现在完成时常与for 和 since 引导的短语或从句连用。 ‎ ‎　　 We have lived here since 1976. ‎ ‎　　 They have waited for more than two hours. ‎ ‎【注意】‎ 一般过去时与现在完成时的区别 ‎　 过去时表示过去某时发生的动作或单纯叙述过去的事情，强调动作；现在完成时为过去发生的，强调过去的事情对现在的影响，强调的是影响；一般过去时常与具体的时间状语连用。‎ 试比较：‎ I saw this film yesterday.（强调看的动作发生过了，不涉及现在）‎ I have seen this film. （强调对现在的影响，电影的内容已经知道了。）‎ ‎（6）过去进行时的用法 ‎ 表示过去某时正在进行的状态或动作。例如：‎ ‎　　I was watching TV when she came to see me. ‎ ‎【注意】‎ 过去进行时和一般过去时都是过去发生的事情，但过去进行时侧重表示过去某一时刻正在进行的动作或所处的状态，强调动作的连续进行，而一般过去时则表示单纯的过去事实，例如：‎ They were building a house last month. （上个月正在建造，建造好与否不知）‎ They built a new house last month. （上个月建造好了，动作已经完成）‎ ‎（7）过去完成时的用法 ‎ ‎　　过去完成时表示过去某一时刻或某一动作之前完成的动作或所处的状态，过去完成时常和 by , before 等词组成的短语和从句连用。 ‎ ‎　　We had already learned two thousands words by the end of last year. ‎ ‎　　When we arrived at the station, they had waited for more than twenty minutes. ‎ ‎（8）过去将来时的用法 过去将来时表示从过去某个时间看将要发生的动作或存在地状态，过去将来时较多地被运用在宾语从句中。例如：‎ They were going to have a meeting.‎ I told him that I would see him off at the station.‎ ‎2.动词的语态 语态有两种：主动语态和被动语态。‎ 主语是动作的发出者为主动语态；主语是动作的接受者为被动语态。‎ ‎（1）被动语态 ‎1) 被动语态最基本的句型结构是： be +及物动词过去分词 ‎ ‎2) 被动语态中的谓语动词一定要是及物动词 因为被动句中的主语是动作的承受者，某些短语动词如look after, think of, take care of, work out, laugh at等，也可用于被动语态。‎ The children were taken good care of by her. ‎ ‎【注意】‎ 短语动词中的介词或副词变成被动语态时不可遗漏。‎ ‎3) 主动语态变为被动语态要加“to”的情况 若宾语补足语是不带to 的不定式，变为被动语态时，该不定式前要加"to"。此类动词为感官动词，如：feel, hear, help, listen to, look at, make, observe, see, notice, watch等。例如：‎ The teacher made me go out of the classroom.‎ I was made to go out of the classroom (by the teacher).‎ ‎4) 主动形式表示被动意义 ‎ 如wash, clean, look, cut, sell, read, wear, feel, draw, write, sell等动词虽然用做主动形式却表示被动的意义。例如：‎ The food tastes good.‎ ‎3.非谓语动词 对非谓语动词的考点是：感官动词后不定式作宾语补足语和动词ing形式作宾语补足语的用法；一些特殊动词的动词不定式作宾语补足语时不带to，但变为被动语态时就要带to；有些动词既可接不定式也可接动词ing形式作宾语，但表达的意思不同。这些都是历年中考的重点。‎ ‎（1）非谓语动词的形式 非谓语动词指的是在句中起名词，形容词或副词作用的动词形式，而不是作谓语的动词形式。 动词的非谓语形式分为动名词，分词，动词不定式。‎ ‎（2）不定式作宾语补足语 Father will not allow us to play on the street.　　　　　　　‎ ‎（3）不定式作目的状语 He ran so fast as to catch the first bus.　‎ ‎（4）用不定式和分词作补足语都可以的动词 这样的动词有感官动词如：see, hear, look, notice, observe, feel等，使役动词如：have, make, leave, keep, get等。接不定式表示动作的完整性，真实性；+doing 表示动作的连续性，进行性。‎ ‎　 I saw him work in the garden yesterday.‎ ‎　 昨天我看见他在花园里干活了。(强调"我看见了"这个事实)‎ ‎　 I saw him working in the garden yesterday.（强调"我见他正干活"这个动作）‎ 昨天我见他正在花园里干活。‎ ‎（5）用不带to不定式的情况 使役动词如： let, have, make等和感官动词如： see, watch, hear, listen to, smell, feel, find 等后作宾补，省略to。在被动语态中则to不能省掉。‎ ‎（6）接动名词与不定式意义不同 ‎1) stop to do　停止，中断做某事后去做另一件事。‎ ‎ stop doing　停止做某事。‎ ‎　　2) forget to do　忘记要去做某事。　(未做)‎ ‎　 forget doing　忘记做过某事。　　(已做)‎ ‎3) remember to do 记得去做某事　　　　 (未做)‎ ‎　 remember doing　记得做过某事　　　 (已做)‎ ‎4) try to do　　努力，企图做某事。‎ ‎　 try doing　 试验，试着做某事。‎ ‎5) go on to do　做了一件事后，接着做另一件事。‎ go on doing　 继续做原来做的事。‎ ‎　 6) mean to do　 打算、想 mean doing　意味着 ‎4. 容易混淆的常用动词的辨析 ‎(1) say, speak, talk, tell的用法。‎ ‎1) say表示讲话，作为及物动词使用，后跟宾语或宾语从句。‎ He said he would go there.‎ It's time to leave. We have to say goodbye to you.‎ ‎2)speak表示“讲话”，一般作为不及物动词使用，而有时作为及物动词后面跟上各种语言作为宾语。‎ Do you speak English?‎ May I speak to Mr Pope, please?‎ ‎3) talk表示“谈话”，是不及物动词，与to , about, with等连用，才可以接宾语。‎ What are you talking about?‎ Mr Jackson is talking with my father in the office now.‎ ‎4) tell 表示“告诉，讲述”是及物动词，可以带双宾语或复合宾语。‎ She told us an interesting story yesterday.‎ My teacher told me that we would have an English exam the next month.‎ ‎(2) look, see, watch和watch的用法。‎ ‎1) look强调“看”这个动作，是不及物动词，常与at连用，然后接宾语。‎ Look! The girl is swimming in the lake.‎ Look at the picture carefully. Can you find something unusual?‎ ‎2) see 指“看见”某物，强调的是结果。‎ They can't see the words on the blackboard.‎ Does Lily often go to see a film on Sunday?‎ ‎3) watch 指的是“观看”，“注视”之意。‎ The twins are watching TV now.‎ He will go to watch a volleyball match.‎ ‎4） read指“看书”、“看报”、“阅读”之意。‎ Don't read in the sun.‎ I like to read newspapers when I am free.‎ ‎(3) borrow, lend和keep的区别。‎ ‎1) borrow意思为“借入”，常常与from连用，是非延续性动词，表示瞬间即能完成的动作。‎ Meimei borrowed a book from the library just now.‎ May I borrow your dictionary?‎ ‎2) lend 是“借出”之意，常常与to连用，同borrow一样，是非延续性动词，只表示瞬间即能完成的动作。‎ Uncle Wany has lent his car to Mr Li.‎ Could you lend us your radio, please?‎ ‎3) keep是“保存”的意思，动作可以延续。‎ How long can the recorder be kept?‎ The farmer kept the pat for two weeks.‎ ‎(4) bring, take, carry 和get的用法。‎ ‎1) bring意思为“拿来”、“带来”。指将某物或某人从别处“带来”。‎ Bring me the book, please.‎ May I bring Jim to see you next Saturday?‎ ‎2) take意思是“拿走”，“带走”，把某物或某人从这里“带来”或“拿到”某处之意。‎ It looks like rain. Take a raincoat with you.‎ Mother took the little girl to the next room.‎ ‎3) carry 是“带着、搬运、携带”的意思，指随身携带，有背着、扛着、抱着、提着的含义，不表明来去的方向。‎ Do you always carry a handbag?‎ The box is heavy. Can you carry it?‎ ‎4) get是去某处将某物拿回来。‎ Please go to my office to get some chalk.‎ There is no water in the bottle. Why not get some?‎ ‎(5) wear, put on和dress的区别 ‎1) wear是“穿着”“戴着”的意思，可以用于穿衣服、穿鞋、戴帽子、戴手套、佩戴首饰等，强调“穿着”的状态。‎ Tom always wears black shoes.‎ He wears a raincoat even when it is fine.‎ She doesn't like to wear a red flowers in her hair.‎ ‎2) put on是“穿上”“戴上”的意思，可以用于穿衣服、穿鞋、戴帽等。着重于穿戴的动作。‎ It's cold. You'd better put on your coat.‎ He put on his hat and went out of the room.‎ ‎3) dress可以作及物动词和不及物动词，有“穿着”“打扮”的意思。作“穿着”解时，只用于穿衣服，不用于穿鞋、戴帽、戴手套。作为及物动词用时，它的宾语是人，不是衣服。dress sb. （给某人穿衣服），而wear作“穿着”用时，也是及物动词，但它的宾语是物，不是人，即wear sth.（穿着衣物）。‎ She always dresses well.‎ Get up and dress quickly.‎ Mary is dressing her child.‎ ‎(6) take, spend 和use的用法。‎ ‎1) take指做某事用多少时间，句型是：It takes/took/ will take + sb. +some time + to do sth.‎ It took me three days to finish the work.‎ It will take you a while week to travel thought the forest.‎ It takes only one hour to fly to Shanghai.‎ ‎2) spend指某人在某事（物）上花费时间或钱。句型是：‎ Someone spends + money/time + on something(in) doing sth.‎ She spent more than 500 yuan on that coat.‎ He didn't spend much time on his lessons.‎ He spent much time (in) correcting students' exercises.‎ Mother spent her evenings (in) washing clothes.‎ ‎3) use表示使用工具、手段等。‎ Do you know how to use the computer?‎ Shall we use your car?‎ ‎(7)reach, get 和arrive的区别。‎ ‎1) reach是及物动词，后面要直接跟表示地点的名词作宾语。‎ After the train had left, they reached the station We reached the top of the mountain at last.‎ ‎2) get是不及动词，常与to连用，再接名词，后面接表示地点的副词时，不用to，get to常用于口语中。‎ When the students got to the cinema, the film had begun.‎ My sister was cooking when mother got home.‎ ‎3) arrive是不及物动词，表示到达一个小地方时，用arrive at, 到达一个大地方时用arrive in。‎ The soldiers arrived at a small village The foreigners will arrive in Shanghai tomorrow.‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (2004年北京海淀区中考试题）‎ ‎ I’m interested in animals, so I ________ every Saturday working in an animal hospital.‎ ‎ A. pay B. get C. take D. spend ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是pay, get, take spend这四个动词的用法区别。在这四个动词中，只有spend常用于 “spend …ding sth.”的句型里，所以选D。‎ ‎2. (2004年安徽省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Listen Helen is singing in the next room.‎ ‎ ---It _________ be Helen. She has gone to Beijing.‎ ‎ A. can’t B. mustn’t C. may D. should ‎ 答案：A。该题考查的是情态动词的用法。表示否定地推测通常用can’t。‎ ‎3. (2004年江西省南昌市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---I called you yesterday evening, but there was no answer.‎ ‎ ---Oh, I am sorry I _________ dinner at my friend’s house.‎ ‎ A. have B. had C. was having D. have had ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是动词的时态。他们谈论的是昨天晚上某一时刻发生的事情，所以用过去进行时。‎ ‎4. (2004年哈尔滨市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---How long have you _______ the moteobike?‎ ‎ ---For about two weeks.‎ ‎ A. bought B. had C. borrowed D. lent ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是延续性动词和非延续性动词的用法区别。这四个动词中只有had 是延续性动词，它的现在完成时可以同表示一段时间的时间状语连用。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一.单项填空 ‎1. Listen! Some of the girls ________ about Harry Potter. Let’s join them.‎ ‎ A. are talking B. talk ‎ C. will talk D. talked ‎2. Our teacher, Miss Chen, ________English on the radio the day bore yesterday.‎ ‎ A. teaches B. taught ‎ C. will teach D. had taught ‎3. I don’t think I _________ you in that dress before.‎ ‎ A. have seen B. was seeing ‎ C. saw D. see ‎4. Susan’s parents have bought a large house with a swimming pool. It _______ be very expensive.‎ ‎ A. must B. can C. mustn’t D. can’t ‎5. Coffee is ready. How nice it ________ ! Would you like some?‎ ‎ A. looks B. smells C. sounds D. feels ‎6. “ Mr. Zhu, you’d better _______ too much meat. You are already over weight,” said the doctor.‎ ‎ A. not to eat B. to eat C. not eat D. eat ‎7. “Don’t always make Michael ________ this or that. He is already a big boy, dear,” Mr. Bush said to his wife.‎ ‎ A. do B. to do C. does D. did ‎8. Sorry, I can’t hear you clearly. Will you please ________ your E-mail address? I’ll ‎ write it down.‎ ‎ A. review B. recite C. report D. repeat ‎9. Don’t ________ your coat, Tom! It’s easy to catch cold in spring.‎ ‎ A. take away B. take off C. take down D. take out ‎10. You _______ go and ask Meimei. She _______ know the answer.‎ ‎ A. must; can B. must; may C. need; can D. can; may ‎11. I’m sorry you’ve missed the train. It ________ 10 minutes ago.‎ ‎ A. left B. has left C. had left D. has been left ‎12. I bought a new dictionary and it ________ me 30 yuan.‎ ‎ A. paid B. spent C. took D. cost ‎13. ---Mum, may I go out and play basketball?‎ ‎ ---_______ you _______ your homework yet?‎ ‎ A. Do; finish B. Are; finishing C. Did; finishing D. Have; finished ‎14. I have to go now. Please remember to ________ the lights when you leave.‎ ‎ A. turn off B. turn down C. turn up D. turn on ‎15. A talk on Chinese history ________ in the school next week.‎ ‎ A. be given B. has been given C. will be given D. will give ‎16. Look! How heavy the rain is! You’d better ________.‎ ‎ A. don’t go now B. stay here when it stops ‎ C. not leave until it stops D. not to leave at once ‎17. You may go fishing if your work ________.‎ ‎ A. is done B. will be done C. has done D. have done ‎18. Cotton _______ nice and soft.‎ ‎ A. is felt B. is feeling C. feel D. feels ‎19. ---Who cleaned the blackboard yesterday, Dick?‎ ‎ ---John _________.‎ ‎ A. cleaned B. does C. did D. is ‎20. ---Linda had nothing for breakfast this morning, _______?‎ ‎ ---No. She got up too late.‎ ‎ A. had she B. hadn’t she C. did she D. didn’t she 二. 阅读短文，并用括号中所给动词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎ A ‎ My name is Wang Bing. I’m from China. Now I ___1____ (study) at this school. I ____2___ (arrive) here on January 8. Since then, I ____3____ (make) a lot of friends. At school we speak English all the time. Next week, some new students from Africa, Asia and Latin America ____4____ (come) to our school. I’m very glad to know this because I enjoy ____5____ (meet) people from other countries.‎ ‎1. study/am studying 2. arrived 3. have made 4. will come 5. meeting ‎ B ‎ ‎ Since 1946, one of the most important inventions has been the computer. It has been changing all our lives.‎ ‎ The first computer ____1___ (build) in 1946. It ____2____ (be) as large as a room and very difficult and slow ____3____ (use). But since the invention of silicon “chip”（硅片），computers ____4____ (become) smaller, easier and faster to operate. Some computers ____5____ (be) as small as TV sets. Some can even ____6___ (make) smaller than a book. And computers ____7____ (get) smaller and smaller all the time. Who knows what the computers of tomorrow ____8___ (be) like?‎ ‎ There ____9___ (be) several reasons why the computer is useful to us. First, a lot of information can ____10____ (put) into computer. Second, the computer works very quickly---thousands of times faster than a man and it will not be tired. Third, modern computers can be built into other kinds of ‎ machines, like radios, cars and planes. So today people can spend less time doing more work with a computer.‎ 三. 用所给动词的适当形式填空 ‎1. No matter what the weather is like, you can always find surfers out _______ (ride) the waves.‎ ‎2. ---What do you use the key for?‎ ‎ ---It is ________ (use) for making the robot work.‎ ‎3. No news _______ (be) good news. I’m sure Jane is still all right.‎ ‎4. ---Are you feeling better these days?‎ ‎ ---Yes, much better. I _______ as well as these days for a long time.‎ ‎5. It ________ (rain) heavily, you’d better not go out now.‎ ‎6. The city of Xian _______ (become) cleaner and cleaner.‎ ‎7. The boys enjoy _______ (see) fight films very much.‎ ‎8. He left the room without _______ (say) goodbye.‎ ‎9. Rice ________ (grow) in the south of China.‎ ‎10. Many trees ________ (plant) in our school yard these years.‎ 四. 用方框中所给的动词或动词词组的适当形式填入下列句子里，使其意思通顺，每个动词或动词词组只能用一次 Allow, fall, not be, phone, receive, show, send for, ‎ pay for, be used for, turn it off, keep on ‎1. It’s rather hot today, but the weather report says the temperature _______ to ‎28C tomorrow.‎ ‎2. “Remember, nobody ________ to eat or drink in the computer room,” the assistant said to the new students.‎ ‎3. Hi, Mike! I _________ your invitation. Thank you very much. I’ll come on time.‎ ‎4. This time yesterday I ________ the foreigners around the ancient church.‎ ‎5. My uncle phoned the booking office of the airline, and he was told there _______ any flights to Singapore in the following three days because of the bad weather.‎ ‎6. Don’t lose heart and ________ trying.‎ ‎7. Don’t watch TV. It’s too late. Please _______ and go to bed right now.‎ ‎8. Computers are useful. They can ________ sending E-mail.‎ ‎9. If you’ve lost this book, you have to _______ it.‎ ‎10. Both of his feet were hurt in the accident. _______ a doctor, please.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一.1.A 2‎‎.B 3.A 4.A 5.B 6.C 7.A 8.D 9.B 10.D 11.A 12.D 13.D 14.A 15.C 16.C 17.A 18.D 19.C 20.C 二. 1. was built 2.was 3. to use 4. have become 5. are 6. be made 7. are getting 8. will be 9. are 10. be put 三. 1.riding 2.used 3.is 4.have not felt 5.is raining 6. is becoming 7.seeing 8.sayig 9.is grown 10.have been planted 四. 1.will fall 2.is allowed 3.have received 4.was showing 5.would not be 6.keep on 7.turn it off 8.be used for 9.pay for 10.Send for ‎（4）数词、冠词考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 四、冠词和数词 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1.不定冠词a与an的用法 2.定冠词the的用法 3."零"冠词 4.基数词的用法 ‎5.序数词的用法 ‎【名师点睛】‎ 一. 冠词的用法 冠词是虚词，放在名词之前，用来说明名词指的人或事物。冠词有两种。‎ A(an)叫不定冠词，the叫定冠词。A用在辅音之前，an用在元音之前。‎ ‎1. 不定冠词的用法 ‎(1) a和an均用在单数名词之前，表示某一类人或事物。例如：‎ John is a student.‎ Mary is an English teacher.‎ ‎(2) 指某一类人或事物中的任何一个。例如:‎ A steel worker makes steel.‎ Pass me an apple, please.‎ ‎(3) 指某人或某物，但不具体说明何人或和物。例如：‎ A student wants to see you.‎ A girl is waiting for you outside.‎ ‎(4) 表示“每一”的意思，相当于every。例如：‎ Take the medicine three times a day.‎ They go to see their parents once a week.‎ ‎2. 定冠词用法 ‎ (1) 特指某（些）人或某（些）事物。例如：‎ ‎ The book on the desk is an English dictionary.‎ ‎ Beijing is the capital of China.‎ ‎ (2) 指说话人和听话人都熟悉的人或事物。例如：‎ ‎ Open the door, please.‎ ‎ Jack is in the library.‎ ‎ (3) 上文提到过的人或事物。例如：‎ ‎ Yesterday John’s father bought him a new bike. The bike cost him 200 yuan.‎ ‎ (4) 表示世界上独一无二的事物。例如：‎ ‎ The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.‎ ‎ (5) 用在序数词和形容词最高级之前。例如：‎ ‎ Shanghai is the biggest city in China.‎ ‎ January is the first month of the year.‎ ‎ (6) 用在某些形容词之前，表示某一类人或事物。例如：‎ ‎ The nurse is kind to the sick.‎ ‎ We should take good care of the old.‎ ‎ (7) 用在某些专有名词之前和某些习惯用语中。例如：‎ ‎ the Great Wall, the Summer palace, in the morning, in the open air等。‎ ‎ (8) 用在姓氏复数之前，表示“某某一家人”，“某某夫妇”。例如：‎ ‎ the Browns, the whites等。‎ ‎3. 不用冠词的情况 ‎ (1) 某些专有名词，抽象名词和物质名词前一般不用冠词。例如：‎ ‎ China, Canada, Japanese, glass, water, love等。‎ ‎ (2) 名词前已有作定语用的this, that, my, your, whose, some, any, no, each, every等代词时，不用冠词。例如：‎ ‎ That is my cap.‎ ‎ I have some questions.‎ ‎ Go down this street.‎ ‎(3) 复数名词表示一类人或事物时，不用冠词。‎ They are workers.‎ We are students.‎ ‎(4) 称呼语前不用冠词，表示头衔和职务的名词前也不加冠词。例如：‎ I don’t feel well today, Mother.‎ Bush was made president of the ‎U.S.‎ ‎(5) 三餐饭的名称前，球类活动，学科和节目名词前，常不用冠词。例如：‎ I have lunch at home.‎ He often plays football after class.‎ We have English and maths every day.‎ ‎(6) 在某些固定词组里，名词之前常不用冠词。例如：‎ By air, at night, at home, go to bed, go to school, on foot, from morning till night 等。‎ 二. 数词的用法 数词分基数词和序数词。基数词表示数目，序数词表示顺序。‎ ‎1. 基数词的用法 ‎(1) 基数词在句中主要用作主语、宾语、定语、表语、同位语，例如：‎ ‎　　 Thirty of them are Party members.（主语）‎ ‎　　 --- How many would you like？‎ ‎　　 --- Three ，please．（作宾语） 　　 The nine boys are from Tianjing.（定语） 　　 Six plus four is ten.（表语） 　　 We four will go with you.（同位语） ‎ ‎(2) 表示一个具体数字时，hundred, thousand, million一律不用复数；在表示一个不确定数字时则用复数。例如：‎ Our country has a population of 1,300 million people.‎ There are three thousand students in our school.‎ After the war, thousands of people became homeless.‎ Maize is the most important food crop for millions of people in the world.‎ ‎　　 They arrived in twos and threes．‎ ‎　 (3) 表示“……十”的数词的复数形式可用来表示人的岁数或年代，例如：‎ ‎　　 He is in his early thirties．‎ ‎　　 He died still in his forties．‎ ‎　　 This took place in 1930s．‎ ‎(4) 表示时刻用基数词。例如：‎ We get up at six.‎ The workers begin work at eight.‎ ‎ 表示“几点过几分”，用介词past,但须在半小时以内。例如：‎ ten past ten, ‎ a quarter past nine,‎ half past twelve ‎ 表示“几点差几分”用介词to, 但分数须在半小时以上。例如：‎ twenty to nine,‎ five to eight,‎ a quarter to ten ‎ 表示“几点几分”还可直接用基数词。例如：‎ seven fifteen,‎ eleven thirty,‎ nine twenty ‎ 2. 序数词的用法 ‎　 （1）序数词主要用作定语，前面要加定冠词，例如：‎ ‎　　 The first truck is carrying a foot baskets． 　　 John lives on the fifteenth floor．‎ ‎　 （2）序数词有时前面可加不定冠词来表示“再一”，“又一”这样的意思，例如：‎ ‎　　 We'll have to do it a second time． ‎ Shall I ask him a third time？ 　　 When I sat down，a fourth man rose to speak．‎ ‎（3）由几个序数词和基数词在拼写时不对应，很容易写错，应特别注意。它们是：one---first, two---second, three---third, five---fifth, eight---eighth, nine---ninth, twelve---twelfth。‎ ‎（4）表示年，月，日时， 年用基数词表示，日用序数词表示。例如：‎ ‎1949年十月一日读作: October (the) first, nineteen sixty ‎2004年九月十日读作：September (the) tenth, two thousand and four ‎（5）表示分数时，分子用基数词表示，分母用序数词表示。分子大于1时，分母加-s。例如：‎ three fourths,‎ one second,‎ two fifths ‎（6）序数词有时用缩写形式： first→1st                     second→2nd third→3rd                     fourth→4th twenty-second→22nd ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (2004年上海市徐汇区中考试题)‎ ‎ About ________ students in our class can describe that place in English.‎ ‎ A. three-fifths B. three-fifth C. third-five D. third-fifths ‎ 答案：A。该题考查的是分数的表示法。分子用基数词表示，分母用序数词表示。分子大于1时，分母应加-s，因此应选A。‎ ‎2. (2004年河北省中考试题)‎ ‎ Nine _______ pounds a week? That’s very good.‎ ‎ A. hundred of B. hundreds of ‎ C. hundreds D. hundred ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是数词的用法。Nine hundred是一个具体的数量，这是数词不能用复数形式，后面也不能加of。所以应选D。‎ ‎3. (2004年北京市海淀区中考试题)‎ ‎ We often have sports after class, and I like to play _______ basketball.‎ ‎ A. a B. an C. the D. 不填 ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是冠词的用法。球类运动之前不加冠词，因此应选D。‎ ‎4. (2004年江西省中考试题)‎ ‎ This is _______ song I’ve told you about. Isn’t it _______ beautiful one?‎ ‎ A. the; the B. a; a C. the; a D. a; the ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是冠词的用法。第一个空是特指，特指我给你说过的那首歌，第二个空是表示某一个类别。所以应选C。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. .单项填空 ‎ 1. This morning I had ________ egg and a bottle of milk for my breakfast.‎ ‎ A. an B. a C. the D./‎ ‎ 2. ---What’s the matter with you?‎ ‎ ---I caught ________ bad cold and had to stay in ________.‎ ‎ A. a;/ B. a; the C. a; a D. the; the ‎ 3. ---Have you seen _______ pen? I left it here this morning.‎ ‎ ---Is it ________ black one? I think I saw it somewhere.‎ ‎ A. a; the B. the; the C. the; a D. a; a ‎ 4. _______ sun is shining brightly.‎ ‎ A. A B. An C. The D. /‎ ‎ 5. There is _______ “h” in the word hour.‎ ‎ A. a B. the C. an D./‎ ‎ 6. Did you enjoy your stay in Xian?‎ ‎ Yes. I had _______ wonderful time.‎ ‎ A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ ‎ 7. ______ sun is bigger than _______ earth.‎ ‎ A. A; the B. A; an C. The; an D. The; the ‎ 8. There is _______ apple and some pears on the table.‎ ‎ A. the B./ C. a D. an ‎ 9. David has _______ cat. It’s very nice.‎ ‎ A. a B. an C. the D./‎ ‎ 10. I’m reading _______ novel. It is _______ interesting story.‎ ‎ A. a; an B. a; a C. the; the D. /; an ‎ 11. It is said that SARS has killed more than ________ people worldwide.‎ ‎ A. three hundreds B. three hundreds’‎ ‎ C. three hundred’s D. three hundred ‎ 12. ---How many workers are there in your factory?‎ ‎ ---There are two __________.‎ ‎ A. hundreds B. hundred C. hundred of D. hundreds of ‎ 13. ---Which is the smallest number of the four?‎ ‎ ---_______________.‎ ‎ A. Two-thirds B. A half C. A quarter D. Three-fourths ‎ 14. ---What do you think of a war, Li Ming?‎ ‎ ---I’ve no idea. But it’s a fact that _______ people had to leave their hometown during the War on Iraq.‎ ‎ A. three thousands B. thousand of ‎ C. thousands of D. several thousands ‎ 15. We all think that the _______ century will bring us more hopes.‎ ‎ A. twenty-first B. twentieth-first ‎ C. twenty-one D. twentieth-one ‎ 16. ---Can you write the number eighty-five thousand, six hundred and twenty-six?‎ ‎ ---Yes, it is __________.‎ ‎ A. 856620 B. ‎85626 C. 58662 D. 58626‎ ‎ 17. When was the PRC founded? It was founded on _________.‎ ‎ A. July 1, 1921 B. October 1, 1949‎ ‎ C. August 1, 1927 D. May 1, 1922‎ ‎ 18. I was 8 years old when my father was 31. This year my father is twice my age. How old am I?‎ ‎ A. 21 B. ‎22 C. 23 D. 24‎ ‎ 19. _______ Chinese are looking for ways to learn English well before Beijing 2008 Olympics.‎ ‎ A. Thousand B. Thousands C. Thousand of D. Thousands of ‎ 20. Both of the two rulers are broken. I want to buy a _______one.‎ ‎ A. three B. third C. forth D. /‎ 二. 句子改错：下面各句A, B, C, D中有一处错误，请指出并改正。‎ ‎1. May is a fifth month of the year.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎2. The film has been on for half a hour.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎3. The boys and the girls often play the foot ball in the afternoon.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎4. It looks rain. Why not take a umbrella with you?‎ ‎ A B C D ‎5. Li Mei often gives us some good information by the e-meil.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎6. We’ve planted two hundreds trees in the centre of our city this year.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎7. Five million of dollars is a lot of money.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎8. There are thousand of children in the park now.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎9. By the end of twenty century, the world population had passed six billion.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎10. Over three fifth of the world’s books and newspapers are written in English.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.A 2‎‎.A 3.D 4.C 5.C 6.A 7.D 8.D 9.A 10.A11.D 12.B 13.C 14.C 15.A 16.B 17.B 18.C 19.D 20.B 二. 1.B a→the 2.D a→an 3.C 去掉the 4.C a→an 5.D去掉the 6.B two hundreds→two hundred 7.B 去掉of 8.B thousand→thousands 9.B twenty→twentieth 10.A three fifth→three fifths ‎ ‎（5）代词考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 五、代词 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1. 人称代词主格、宾格形式及其主要用法；‎ ‎2. 名词性物主代词与形容词性物主代词的形式、区别及其主要用法；‎ ‎3 反身代词的形式、意义及其主要用法；‎ ‎4 常见不定代词的一般用法；‎ ‎5. 指示代词的一般用法，并了解其在上下文中的指代用法；‎ ‎6. 相互代词的基本用法；‎ ‎7. 疑问代词的基本用法。‎ ‎8. 关系代词的基本用法。 【名师点睛】‎ ‎　 代词是代替名词、形容词和数词的词。按其意义、特征及其在句中的作用分为：人称代词、物主代词、指示代词、反身代词、相互代词、疑问代词、不定代词和关系代词等。 ‎ 一. 人称代词 　1.人称代词的人称、数和格，如下表所示。 ‎ 主格 宾格 第一 人称 单数 I 我 ‎ me我 复数 we 我们 ‎ us 我们 ‎ 第二 人称 单数 you 你 you 你 复数 you 你们 ‎ you你们 ‎ 第 三 人 称 单 数 he 他 him他 she 她 her她 it 它 it它 复 数 they他们、‎ 她们、它们 them 他们、‎ 她们、它们 ‎　2.人称代词有主格和宾格之分。通常主格作主语，宾格作宾语。如： 　 I like table tennis. （作主语）‎ Do you know him?（作宾语）‎ ‎3.人称代词还可作表语。作表语时用宾格。如：‎ ‎---Whos is knocking at the door?‎ ‎---It’s me.‎ ‎4.人称代词在than之后与其他人或事物进行比较时，用主格和宾格都可以。如：‎ He is older than me.‎ He is older than I am. 二. 物主代词 　1.表示所有关系的代词叫物主代词。物主代词分形容词性物主代词和名词性 物主代词，如下表所示。 ‎ 物主代词 形容词型 名词型 单数 第一人称 my mine 第二人称 your yours 第三人称 his his her hers its its 复数 第一人称 our ours 第二人称 your yours 第三人称 their theirs ‎　2. 形容词性物主代词的作用相当于形容词，可在句中作定语。例如： 　 Our teacher is coming to see us. 　 This is her pencil-box. ‎ ‎　3. 名词性物主代词的作用相当于名词，在句中可用作主语、宾语和表语。 　　 Our school is here, and theirs is there.（作主语） 　 --- Is this English-book yours? （作表语） 　 --- No. Mine is in my bag. 　 I've already finished my homework. Have you finished yours? （作宾语） 三. 指示代词 　 指示代词包括：this，that，these，those。 ‎ ‎1. this和these一般用来指在时间或空间上较近的事物或人，that和those 则指时间和空间上较远的事物或人，例如： 　 This is a pen and that is a pencil． 　 We are busy these days． 　 In those days the workers had a hard time．‎ ‎2. 有时that和those指前面讲到过的事物，this 和these则是指下面将要讲 ‎ 到的事物，例如： 　 I had a cold. That's why I didn't come. 　 What I want to say is this ; pronunciation is very important in learning English．‎ ‎3. 有时为了避免重复提到的名词，常可用that或those代替，例如： 　 Television sets made in Beijing are just as good as those made in Shanghai． 4. this 在电话用语中代表自己，that 则代表对方。例如：‎ ‎ Hello! This is Mary. Is that Jack speaking?‎ 四. 反身代词 　 英语中用来表示"我自己"，"你自己"，"他自己"，"我们自己"，"你们自己"‎ 等意义的代词称为反身代词，也有人称之为自身代名词，其形式如表所示。 ‎ 反身代词 单数 第一人称 myself 第二人称 yourself 第三人称 himself herself itself 复数 第一人称 ourselves 第二人称 yuorselves 第三人称 themselves ‎ 反身代词可以在句中作宾语，表语，同位语。‎ ‎　 1. 作宾语，表示动作的承受者就是动作的发出者，主语和宾语指同一个人 或一些人。 　 He called himself a writer． 　 Would you please express yourself in English?　‎ ‎2. 作表语。 　 It doesn't matter．I'll be myself soon． 　 The girl in the news is myself． 　 3. 作主语或宾语的同位语，表示亲自或本人。 　 I myself washed the clothes．（=I washed the clothes myself.）（作主语同位语） 　 You should ask the teacher himself．（作宾语同位语） 五. 不定代词 　 不是指明代替任何特定名词的代词叫做不定代词，在句中可作主语、表 语、宾语和定语。现将几个常用的不定代词举例说明如下：‎ ‎1. some与any的区别 ‎1）some多用于肯定句，表示“一些，几个”作形容词时，后面可以接①不可数名词+单数动词；②可数名词+复数动词。‎ ‎ Look! Some of the students are cleaning the library.‎ ‎ . Some rice in the bag has been sold out.‎ ‎ 2）any多用于疑问句、条件句和否定句中，表示“一些，任何”用作形容词时，后面可以接①不可数名词+单数动词；②可数名词+复数动词。‎ ‎ If you have any questions, please ask me.‎ ‎ There isn't any orange in the bottle.‎ ‎ Have you got any tea?‎ ‎ 3）any和some也可以作代词用，表示“一些”。any多用于疑问句或否定句中，some多用于肯定句中。‎ ‎ How many people can you see in the picture?‎ ‎ I can't see any.‎ ‎ If you have no money, I'll lend you some.‎ ‎ 注意：与some, any结合的词如something, somebody, someone, anything, anyone, anybody在肯定句、否定句、疑问句、条件句中的用法，大致和some, any的用法相同。‎ ‎2. few, a few, little, a little在用法上的区别 ‎1）用作形容词：‎ ‎ 含义 用法 表示肯定 表示否定 用于可数名词 a few虽少，但有几个 few不多，几乎没有 用于不可数名词 a little，虽少，但有一点 little不多，没有什么 ‎ I'm going to buy a few apples.‎ ‎ He can speak only a little Chinese.‎ ‎ There is only a little milk in the glass.‎ ‎ He has few friends.‎ ‎ They had little money with them.‎ ‎ 2）a little和little也可以用作副词，a little表示“有点，稍微”，little表示“很少”。‎ ‎ I'm a little hungry. (修饰形容词hungry)‎ ‎ Let him sleep a little. (修饰动词sleep)‎ ‎ Mary, go a little faster, please. (修饰副词比较级)‎ ‎ She slept very little last night.‎ ‎3. other, the other, another, others, the others的区别。‎ 用 法 代名词 形容词 单数 复数 单数 复数 不定 another 另一个 others 别人，其他人 another (boy)‎ 另一个（男孩）‎ other (boys)‎ 其他男孩 特定 the other 另一个 the others 其余那些人、物 the other (boy)‎ 另一个男孩 the other (boys)‎ 其余那些男孩 ‎1）other可以作形容词用，后面可以跟单数或复数名词，意思是“其他的、别 的”。‎ ‎ Where are his other books?‎ ‎ I haven't any other books except this one.‎ ‎ 2）other也可以用作代词，与冠词the连用构成“the other”，表示两个人或物中的“另一个”。常与one搭配构成“one ..., the other ...”句型。‎ ‎ He has two brothers. One is 10 years old , the other is 5 years old.‎ ‎ She held a ruler in one hand and an exercise-book in the other.‎ ‎ 3）other作代词用时，可以有复数“others”，泛指“另外的人或物”。常与some搭配构成“some ...., others ...”句型。‎ ‎ Some went to the cinema, others went swimming.‎ ‎ This coat is too large. Show me some others, please.‎ ‎ 4）“the others”表示特指某范围内的“其他的人或物”。‎ ‎ We got home by 4 o'clock, but the others didn't get back until 8 o'clock.‎ ‎ In our class only Tom is English, the others are Chinese.‎ ‎5）another可以作形容词用，修饰后面的名词，意为“另一个”，还可以跟代词one.‎ ‎ You can see another ship in the sea, can't you?‎ ‎ Mary doesn't want to buy this skirt. Would you please show her another one?‎ ‎ 6）another也可以作代词用，表示“另一个”。‎ ‎ I'm still hungry after I've had this cake. Please give me another.‎ ‎4. every与each的区别。‎ each every ‎1)可单独使用 ‎1)不可单独使用 ‎2)可做代名词、形容词 ‎2)仅作形容词 ‎3)着重“个别”‎ ‎3)着重“全体”，毫无例外 ‎4)用于两者或两者以上中的每一个人或物 ‎4)用于三者或三者以上每一个人或物 ‎ The teacher gave a toy to each child.‎ ‎ Each ball has a different colour.‎ ‎ 当我们说each child, each student或each teacher时，我们想到的是一个人的情况。而当我们说every child和every student时，我们想到的是全体的情况，every的意思与all接近，表示他们都如此。‎ ‎ Every student loves the English teacher. = All students love the English teacher.‎ Every child likes playing. = All children like playing.‎ ‎5. all和both的用法。‎ ‎1）all指三者以上，或不可数的东西。谓语动词既可以用单数，也可以用作复数。在句中作主语、表语、宾语、同位语和定语。‎ ‎ All of us like Mr Pope. 我们都喜欢Pope先生。（作主语）‎ ‎ = We all like Mr Pope. (作同位语)‎ ‎ All the water has been used up. (作主语)‎ ‎ That's all for today. (作表语)‎ ‎ Why not eat all (of) the fish? (作宾语)‎ ‎ All the leaders are here. (作定语)‎ ‎ 2）both作代词。‎ ‎①与其他名词或代词并列出现，表示“两个都”。‎ ‎ Lucy and Lily both agree with us.‎ ‎ They both passed on their sticks at the same time.‎ ‎ How are your parents? They're both fine.‎ ‎ ②与“of +代词（或名词）”连用，表示“两者都”。‎ ‎ Both of them came to see Mary.‎ ‎ Both of the books are very interesting.‎ ‎ ③单独使用，表示“两者（都）”。‎ ‎ Michael has two sons. Both are clever.‎ ‎ I don't know which book is the better, I shall read both.‎ ‎ 3）both用作形容词，放在名词之前，修饰该名词，表示“两者都”。‎ ‎ Both his younger sisters are our classmates.‎ ‎ . There are tall trees on both sides of the street.‎ 六. 相互代词 表示相互关系的代词叫做相互代词。相互代词有each other 和one another两种形 式。在当代英语中，each other和one another没有什么区别。相互代词可在句中作宾语，定语。作定语用时，相互代词用所有格形式。 　 We should learn from each other / one another. （作宾语） 　 Do you often write to each other / one another? （作宾语） 　 We often borrow each other's / one another's books. （作定语） 　 The students corrected each other's / one another's mistakes in their homework. ‎ ‎（作定语）‎ 七. 疑问代词 疑问代词有who，whom，whose，what和which等。疑问代词用于特殊疑 问句中，一般都放在句首，并在句子中作为某一句子成分。例如：‎ Who is going to come here tomorrow? （作主语）‎ What is that? (作表语)‎ Whose umbrella is this? (作定语)‎ Whom are you waiting for? (作宾语)‎ 八.关系代词 关系代词是一种引导从句并起连接主句和从句作用的代词。关系代词有 who, whose, whom, that, which. 它们在句中可用作主语,表语,宾语,定语. 在主句中,它们还代表着从句所修饰的那个名词或代词。例如：‎ I hate people who talk much but do little.‎ I’m looking at the photograph which you sent me with your letter.‎ With the money that he had saved, he went on with his studies.‎ Do you know the lady who is interviewing our headmaster?‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (2004年北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ Mary, please show ________ your picture.‎ ‎ A. my B. mine C. I D. me ‎ 答案：D。该提考查的是人称代词和物主代词的用法。在本题中，动词show的后面要跟双宾语，空白处缺少一个间接宾语，所以应选me。‎ ‎2. (2004年北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---What’s on TV tonight? Is there _________ interesting?‎ ‎ ---I’m afraid not.‎ ‎ A. something B. anything C. nothing D. everything ‎ 答案：B。该提考查的是不定代词的用法。这是一个疑问句。在疑问句中，通常用anything。‎ ‎3. (2004年上海徐汇区中考试题)‎ ‎ ________ of them has his own opinion.‎ ‎ A. Both B. Some C. Every D. Each ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是不定代词用法。因为谓语动词是单数形式，所以Both和Some都不对。Every 不能作主语，所以只有Each合适。‎ ‎4. (2004年安徽省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Where is my pen?‎ ‎ ---Oh, sorry. I have taken _______ by mistake.‎ ‎ A. yours B. his C. mine D. hers ‎ 答案：A。该题考查的是物主代词的用法。根据题干的背景，我们可以判断出错拿的钢笔应该是对方的，所以选yours。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1. Tom, Please pass ________ the glasses. I want to read the newspapers.‎ ‎ A. you B. me C. him D. her ‎2. The English novel is quite easy for you. There are ______ new words in it.‎ ‎ A. a little B. little C. a few D. few ‎3. ---You want ________ sandwich?‎ ‎ ---Yes, I usually eat a lot when I’m hungry.‎ ‎ A. other B. another C. others D. the other ‎4. The doctors and nurses are doing their best to fight SARS. They think more of others than _______. ‎ ‎ A. they B. them C. themselves D. theirs ‎5. ---Which do you prefer, a bottle of orange or a bottle of milk?‎ ‎ ---______________, thanks. I’d like a cup of tea.‎ ‎ A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. None ‎6. ---Oh! I came in a hurry and forgot to bring food.‎ ‎ ---Never mind. You can have ________.‎ ‎ A. us B. ours C. you D. yours ‎7. ---Can I come this evening or tomorrow morning?‎ ‎ ---_______ is OK. I’m free today and tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. None ‎8. ---How are you going to improve _______ this term?‎ ‎ ---Work harder than last term.‎ ‎ A. ourselves B. myself C. himself D. yourself ‎9. ---Could you tell me _______ she is looking for?‎ ‎ ---Her cousin, Susan.‎ ‎ A. that B. whose C. who D. which ‎10. ---Is _______ here?‎ ‎ ---No. Li Lei and Han Mei have asked for leave.‎ ‎ A. everybody B. somebody C. anybody D. nobody ‎11. Paul has _______ friends except me, and sometimes he feels lonely.‎ ‎ A. many B. some C. few D. more ‎12. If you want to book a round-trip ticket, you’ll have to pay ______ $ 30.‎ ‎ A. more B. other C. the other D. another ‎13. ---Do you live by yourself, Mr Wang?‎ ‎ ---Yes. I have two sons. But ______ of them lives with me. They are now studying in America?‎ ‎ A. neither B. both C. none D. either ‎14. ---Have you sent your parents an E-mail telling them you arrived safe?‎ ‎ ---No. _______ of them can use a computer.‎ ‎ A. None B. Both C. Neither D. All ‎15. Who taught _______ English last term? Was _____ Mr. Smith?‎ ‎ A. you; it B. you; he C. your; it D. your; that ‎16. ---That woman has a bag in her right hand. What’s in her _____ hand?‎ ‎ A. another B. other C. one D. the other ‎17. We decided to go for a field trip with some friends of _______.‎ ‎ A. us B. our C. ours D. ourselves ‎18. ---Is there a bus to the zoo?‎ ‎ ---I’m afraid there’s _______ bus to the zoo.‎ ‎ A. no B. any C. some D. none ‎19. You forgot your dictionary? You may have _______.‎ ‎ A. me B. my C. mine D. myself ‎20. This is ______ classroom. Where is _______?‎ ‎ A. our; them B. us; they C. our; theirs D. ours; theirs 二. 用所给代词的适当形式填空 ‎1. This is not my pencil-box. _______ ( I ) is in the bag.‎ ‎2. Trees are planted in ______ ( we ) country every year, which makes our country more and more beautiful.‎ ‎3. ---Is that bike Miss Gao’s?‎ ‎ ---Yes, it is ______(she) . Beautiful, isn’t it?‎ ‎4. Help ______ (you) to some fruit, Jack.‎ ‎5. ---Who taught your brother to surf?‎ ‎ ---Nobody. He learnt all by _______ (he).‎ ‎6. Their English teacher is from America, but ______ (we) is from England.‎ ‎7. Mary’s answer is different from ________ ( I ).‎ ‎8. ---My watch keeps good time. What about _______(you)?‎ ‎ ---Mine? Oh, two minutes slow.‎ ‎9. Sam is my brother. Do you like to play with ______ (he)?‎ ‎10. Did you enjoy _______ (you), Mary and Kate?‎ 三. 用适当的代词填空 ‎1. The old man has two sons. One is a worker, _______ is a teacher.‎ ‎2. Students are usually interested in sports. Some like running; some like swimming; _______ like ball games.‎ ‎3. Let’s go and have a drink. We’ve got _______ time before the train leaves.‎ ‎4. We were all very tired, but _______ of us would like to have a rest.‎ ‎5. ______ of the twins are in our class.‎ ‎6. Boys, don’t touch the machines, or you may hurt _______.‎ ‎7. It is said there is going to be ________ important in the CCTV news.‎ ‎8. We couldn’t buy anything because _______ of the shops opened at that time.‎ ‎9. They didn’t learn _______ new in this lesson.‎ ‎10. ---Why is ______ easy for such a young girl to learn three foreign languages so well?‎ ‎ ---Because Britain, Germany and France are all very near ______ country.‎ 四. 用适当的疑问代词和关系代词填空 ‎1. ______ is the population of the world today?‎ ‎2. _______ jumped the longest of all in the long jump?‎ ‎3. --- _______ colour is your mother’s dress?‎ ‎ ---It’s black.‎ ‎4. ---______ is your car?‎ ‎ ---The red one in front of the tree.‎ ‎5. ---______ of the following can you often find on a medicine bottle?‎ ‎ ---I know, sir. It’s instruction.‎ ‎6. The necklace ______ she is wearing is beautiful.‎ ‎7. Do you know the person _______ lost his bike?‎ ‎8. Most people _______ live in less developed countries are quite poor.‎ ‎9. The boy ______ is helping the old man is John’s brother.‎ ‎10. People ______ use credit cards to buy things online should be very careful ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.B 2.D 3.B 4.C 5.B 6.B 7.A 8.D 9.C 10.A 11.C 12.D 13.A 14.C 15.A 16.B 17.C 18.A 19.C 20.C 二.1.Mine 2.our 3.hers 4.yourself 5.himself 6.ours 7.mine 8.yours 9.him 10.yourselves 三. 1..the other 2.others 3.a little 4. none 5.Both 6.yourselves 7.something 8.none 9.anything 10.it; her 四. 1. What 2. Who 3. What 4. Which 5. Which 6. that/ which 7. that/ who 8. who/that 9. who/ that 10. who/ that ‎（6）介词、连词考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ ‎ ‎ 六、介词和连词 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1. 常用介词及其词组的主要用法和意义；‎ ‎2. 常用动词、形容词与介词、副词的固定搭配及其意义。‎ ‎3. 并列连词and, but, or, so等的主要用法；‎ ‎4. 常用的从属连词的基本用法 ‎ ‎【名师点睛】‎ ‎1. 介词的功能 介词是一种虚词，用来表示名词或相当于名词的其它词语句中其它词的关系，不能单独使用。介词可与名词或相当于名词的其它词构成介词短语。介词短语可在句中作定语，状语，表语和宾语补足语。例如：‎ The boy over there is John’s brother. (定语)‎ The girl will be back in two hours. (状语)‎ Our English teacher is from Australia. (表语)‎ Help yourself to some fish. (宾语补足语)‎ ‎2. 常用介词的用法辨析 ‎（1）表时间的介词 ‎1）at, in on 表示时间点用at。例如：at six o’clock, at noon, at midnight。表示在某个世纪，某年，某月，某个季节以及早晨，上午，下午，晚上时，用in。例如：in the ninettenth century, in 2002, in may, in winter, in the morning, in the afternoon等。表示具体的某一天和某一天的上午，下午，晚上时，用on。例如：on Monday, on July 1st, on Sunday morning等。‎ ‎2）since, after 由since和after 引导的词组都可表示从过去某一点开始的时段，但since词组表示的时段一直延续到说话的时刻，因而往往要与现在完成时连用。而after词组所表示的时段纯系过去，因而要与一般过去时连用。例如：‎ I haven’t heard from him since last summer.‎ After five days the boy came back.‎ ‎3）in, after in与将来时态连用时，表示“过多长时间以后”的意思，后面跟表示一段时间的词语。After与将来时态连用时，后面只能跟表示时间点的词语。After与过去时态连用时，后面才能跟表示一段时间的词语。例如：‎ He will be back in two months.‎ He will arrive after four o’clock.‎ He returned after a month.‎ ‎（2）表示地点的介词 ‎1）at, in, on at一般指小地方；in一般指大地方或某个范围之内；on往往表示“在某个物体的表面”。例如：‎ He arrived in Shanghai yesterday.‎ They arrived at a small village before dark.‎ There is a big hole in the wall.‎ The teacher put up a picture on the wall.‎ ‎2）over, above, on over, on和above都可表示“在……上面”，但具体含义不同。Over表示位置高于某物，在某物的正上方，其反义词是under。 above也表示位置高于某物，但不一定在正上方，其反义词是below。On指两个物体表面接触，一个在另一的上面。例如：‎ There is a bridge over the river.‎ We flew above the clouds.‎ ‎ They put some flowers on the teacher’s desk.‎ ‎3）across, through across和through均可表示“从这一边到另一边”，但用法不同。Across的含义与on有关，表示动作在某一物体的表面进行。Throgh的含义与in有关，表示动作是在三维空间进行。例如：‎ The dog ran across the grass.‎ The boy swam across the river.‎ ‎ They walked through the forest.‎ ‎ I pushed through the crowds.‎ ‎4) in front of, in the front of in front of 表示“在某人或某物的前面”，在某个范围以外；in the front of 表示“在……的前部”，在某个范围以内。例如：‎ There are some tall trees in front of the building.‎ The teacher is sitting in the front of the classroom.‎ ‎3. 介词的固定搭配 ‎ 介词往往同其他词类形成了固定搭配关系。记住这种固定搭配关系，才能正确使用介词。‎ ‎（1）介词与动词的搭配 listen to , laugh at, get to, look for wait for, hear from, turn on, turn off, worry about, think of, look after, spend…on…, 等。‎ ‎（2）介词与名词的搭配 on time, in time, by bus, on foot, with pleasure, on one’s way to, in trouble, at breakfast, at the end of, in the end等。‎ ‎（3）介词与形容词的搭配 be late for, be afraid of, be good at, be interested in, be angry with, be full of, be sorry for等。‎ ‎4. 连词的功能 用来连接词，短语，从句或句子的词叫连词。连词是一种虚词，在句中不能单独使用。连词可分为两类：并列连词和从属连词。‎ ‎5. 并列连词 并列连词用来连接具有并列关系的词，短语或句子。常见的并列连词有：‎ ‎(1)表并列关系的and, both…and, not only…but also, neither…nor等。‎ ‎(2)表选择关系的or, either…or等。‎ ‎(3)表转折关系的but, while等。‎ ‎(4)表因果关系的for, so等。‎ ‎6. 从属连词 从属连词用来引导从句。常见的从属连词有：‎ ‎(1)引导时间状语从句的after, before, when, while, as, until, till, since, as soon as等。(2)引导条件状语从句的if, unless等。‎ ‎(3)引导原因状语从句的because, as, since等。‎ ‎(4)引导目的状语从句的so that, in order that等。‎ ‎(5)引导让步状语从句的though, although, even if等。‎ ‎(6)引导结果状语从句的so that, so…that, such…that等。‎ ‎(7)引导比较状语从句的than, as…as等。‎ ‎(8)引导名词从句的that, if , whether等。‎ ‎7. 常用连词的用法辨析 ‎（1） while, when, as 这三个连词都可引导时间状语从句，但用法有所不同。‎ ‎1) 当某事正在进行的时候，又发生了另一件事。While, when, as 都可用来引导表示“背景”的时间状语从句。例如：‎ As/When/While I was walking down the street I noticed a police car.‎ ‎2) 当两个长动作同时进行的时候，最常用的是while。例如：‎ While mother was cooking lunch, I was doing my homework.‎ ‎3) 当两个动作都表示发展变化的情况时，最常用的是as。例如：‎ As children get older, they become more and more interested in things around them.‎ ‎4) 当两个短动作同时发生时，或表示“一边…一边…”时，最常用as。例如：‎ Just as he caught the fly, he gave a loud cry.‎ She looked behind from time to time as she went ‎5) 当从句的动作先于主句的动作时，通常用when。例如：‎ When he finished his work, he took a short rest.‎ ‎6) 当从句是瞬间动作，主句是延续性动作时，通常用when。例如：‎ When John arrived I was cooking lunch.‎ ‎（2）as, because, since , for 这四个词都可表原因，但用法有区别。‎ ‎1) 如果原因构成句子的最主要部分，一般用because。因此，because引导的从句往往放在句末。例如：‎ I stayed at home because it rained.‎ ‎---Why aren’t you going?‎ ‎---Because I don’t want to.‎ ‎2) 如果原因已被人们所知，或不如句子的其它部分重要，就用as或since。Since比as稍微正式一点。As和since 引导的从句一般放在句子的开头。例如：‎ As he wasn’t ready, we left without him.‎ Since I have no money, I can’t buy any food.‎ ‎3) for用来补充说明一种理由，因此，for引导的从句几乎可以放在括号里。For引导的句子不放在句子的开头。例如：‎ I decided to stop and have lunch----for I was feeling quite hungry.‎ ‎（3）if, whether if和whether都可作“是否”讲，在引导宾与从句是一般可互换。例如：‎ I wonder whether (if) you still study in that school.‎ I don’t know whether (if) he likes that film.‎ 在下列情况下，只能用whether,不能用if：‎ ‎1) 引导主语从句时。例如：‎ Whether he will come to the party is unknown. ‎ ‎2) 引导表语从句时。例如：‎ The question is whether I can pass the exam.‎ ‎3) 在不定式前。例如：‎ I haven’t made up my mind whether to go there or not.‎ ‎（4）so…that, such...that ‎1) so…that中的so是个副词，其后只能跟形容词或副词，而such...that中的such是个形容词，后接名词或名词短语。例如：‎ I’m so tired that I can’t walk any farther.‎ It was such a warm day that he went swimming.‎ ‎2) 如果在名词之前有many, much, little, few时，用so,不用such。例如：‎ He has so little education that he is unable to get a job.‎ I have had so many falls that I am black and blue all over.‎ ‎（5）either…or…, neither…nor, not only…but also…‎ 这三个连词词组都可连接两个并列成分。当它们连接两个并列主语时，‎ 谓语动词要随相邻的主语变化。例如：‎ Either you or he is wrong.‎ Neither he nor his children like fish.‎ ‎ Not only the teacher but also the students want to buy the book.‎ ‎（6）although, but 这两个连词不能用在同一个句子中。例如：我们不能说“Although he is ‎ over sixty, but he works as hard as others.”这个句子应改为：Although he is over sixty, he works as hard as others.或He is over sixty, but he works as hard as others.‎ ‎（7）because, so 这两个连词同样不能用在同一个句子中。例如：我们不能说“Because John ‎ was ill, so I took him to the doctor.” 这个句子应改为Because John was ill, I took him to the doctor.或John was ill, so I took him to the doctor.‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1.（2004年北京市中考试题）‎ ‎ ---When will Mr Black come to Beijing?‎ ‎ ---___________ September 5.‎ ‎ A. On B. To C. At D. In ‎ 答案：A。表示时间的介词的用法。表示某一天用介词on。‎ ‎2. (2004年安徽省中考试题)‎ ‎ The boys felt sad as they lost ________ the girls in the talk show.‎ ‎ A. by B. in C. to D. on ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是介词和动词的固定搭配。lose表示输给谁的时候用介词to。应选C。‎ ‎3. (2004年吉林省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---I like riding fast. It’s very exciting.‎ ‎ ---Oh! You mustn’t do it like that, ________ it may have an accident.‎ ‎ A. and B. or C. so D. but ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是并列连词的用法。答语的意思是“你不要那样做，否则会发生事故的。”在这四个并列连词中，只有or含有这样的意思，所以应选B。‎ ‎4. (2004年天津市中考试题)‎ ‎ John fell asleep ________ he was listening to the music.‎ ‎ A. after B. before C. while D. as soon as ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是引导时间状语从句的常用从属连词的用法。本句的含义是“约翰在听音乐的时候睡着了。”表示在干某事时发生了某个事情” 通常用while。因此应选C。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎ 1. We traveled overnight to Paris and arrived _______ 5 o’clock ______ the morning.‎ ‎ A. on; in B. at; in C. at; on D. in; on ‎ 2. Where’s Lily? We are all here _______ her.‎ ‎ A. beside B. about C. except D. with ‎ 3. She sent her friend a postcard _______ a birthday present.‎ ‎ A. on B. as C. for D. of ‎ 4. Jack has studied Chinese in this school _______ the year of 2000.‎ ‎ A. since B. in C. on D. by ‎ 5. ---What is a writing brush, do you know?‎ ‎ ---It’s _______ writing and drawing.‎ ‎ A. with B. to C. for D. by ‎ 6. English is widely used ______ travellers and business people all over the world.‎ ‎ A. to B. for C. as D. by ‎ 7. ______ the help of my teacher, I caught up with the other students.‎ ‎ A. Under B. In C. With D. On ‎ 8. Hong Kong is ______ the south of China, and Macao is ______ the west of Hong Kong.‎ ‎ A. in; to B. to; to C. to; in D. in; in ‎ 9. ---You’d better not go out now. It’s raining.‎ ‎ ---It doesn’t matter. My new coat can keep ______ rain.‎ ‎ A. in B. of C. with D. off ‎ 10. Japan lies ______ the east of China.‎ ‎ A. to B. in C. about D. at ‎ 11. ---Will the foreigners have any problems talking with Chinese in 2008?‎ ‎ ---I don’t think so. Now ______ the young ______ the old can speak some English.‎ ‎ A. either…or B. not only… but also ‎ C. neither…nor D. both…or ‎ 12. We didn’t catch the train _______ we left late.‎ ‎ A. so B. because C. but D. though ‎ 13. Tom failed in the exam again _______ he wanted to pass it very much.‎ ‎ A. if B. so C. though D. as ‎ 14. I won’t believe that the five-year-old boy can read five thousand words ______ I have tested him myself.‎ ‎ A. after B. when C. if D. until ‎ 15. The book was so interesting that he had read it for three hours ______ he realized it.‎ ‎ A. when B. until C. after D. before ‎ 16. ---This dress was last year’s style.‎ ‎ ---I think it still looks perfect ______ it has gone out this year.‎ ‎ A. so that B. even though C. as if D. ever since ‎ 17. Hurry up, _______ you will miss the train.‎ ‎ A. and B. so C. however D. or ‎ 18. The mountain was ______ steep _____ few people in our city reached the top.‎ ‎ A. so…as B. so…that C. as…as D. too…to ‎ 19. ---Do you remember our pleasant journey to Xi’an?‎ ‎ ---Of course. I remember everything ______ it happened yesterday.‎ ‎ A. as soon as B. even though ‎ C. rather than D. as if ‎ 20. ______ you can’t answer this question, we have to ask someone else for help.‎ ‎ A. Although B. While C. Whether D. Since 二. 用适当的介词填空 ‎ 1. ---How are you going to the train station to meet your aunt?‎ ‎ ---I’m going there _______ my car.‎ ‎ 2. Mum, today is Mother’s Day. Mike and I want to invite you to have dinner _____ us at Zhonglou Restaurant.‎ ‎ 3. Hangzhou is famous ______ the West Lake.‎ ‎ 4. Today some newly-produced mobile phones can take pictures ______ a camera.‎ ‎ 5. Could you tell me if there is a flight to the capital ______ March, 25th?‎ ‎ 6. We all agree ______ you. Let’s start at once.‎ ‎ 7. There is a big shop ______ the other side of the road.‎ ‎ 8. ---Which necklace have you lost?‎ ‎ ---The one you gave me _____ my birthday.‎ ‎ 9. You should take more exercise. It’s good ______ your health.‎ ‎ 10. It is clear that fish cannot live _______ water.‎ 三. 用适当的连词填空 ‎ 1. ______ they are brothers, they don’t look like each other at all.‎ ‎ 2. The dress was very expensive, ______ I didn’t buy it.‎ ‎ 3. ---Do you know ______ I could pass the exam?‎ ‎ ---Sorry, I’ve no idea.‎ ‎ 4. Mr. Brown knows little Japanese, ______ he can’t understand the instructions on the bottle of the pills.‎ ‎ 5. The war was over about a year ago, ______ the American soldiers in Iraq are still having a lot of trouble to deal with.‎ ‎ 6. ---Is David at school today?‎ ‎ ---No. He is at home _______ he has a bad cold.‎ ‎ 7. _____ Lily _____ Lucy may go with you because one of them must stay at home.‎ ‎ 8. Study hard, _____ you are sure to have a good result in the exam.‎ ‎ 9. Please have a wash _______ you go to bed.‎ ‎ 10. The twins have learned a lot ______ they came to China.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.B 2.C 3.B 4.A 5.C 6.D 7.C 8.A 9.D 10.A11.B 12.B 13.C 14.D 15.D 16.B 17.D 18.B 19.D 20.D 二. 1.in 2.with 3.for 4.like 5.on 6.with 7.on 8.for 9.for 10.without 三. 1.Although/ Though 2.so 3.if/ whether 4.so 5.but 6.because 7.Either…or 8.and 9.before 10.since ‎（7）有关英语句子的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 七、句子种类 ‎【考点直击】‎ 按照句子的用途，英语句子可分为陈述句、疑问句、祈使句和感叹句。按照句子的结构，英语句子可分为简单句、并列句和复合句。中考对句子的考查主要集中在以下几个方面：‎ ‎1. 陈述句的构成形式及基本用法；‎ ‎2. 祈使句的构成形式及基本用法；‎ ‎3. 一般疑问句、特殊疑问句、选择疑问句、反意疑问句的构成形式及基本用法；‎ ‎4. 由what, how引导的感叹句的构成形式、用法及区别 对于各种从句的用法我们在后面分别论述。‎ ‎【名师点睛】‎ 一. 陈述句的构成形式及基本用法 ‎1. 陈述句：‎ ‎　　 陈述句是用来陈述一个事实或表达说话人看法（包括肯定和否定）的句子。通常用降调，句末用句号“.”。‎ ‎　　Tom has a new car. ‎ ‎　　The flower isn’t beautiful. ‎ ‎2. 陈述句否定式的构成 ‎　　(1) 如果肯定陈述句的谓语部分含有助动词、情态动词或连系动词be，则只需在这些动词后加not即可构成否定式。‎ ‎    He is playing the guitar.（肯定）‎ He is not playing the guitar.（否定）‎ ‎    We can get there before dark.（肯定）‎ ‎     We can’t get thee before dark.（否定）‎ ‎　　(2) 如果陈述句的谓语动词是实义动词，而其中又没有情态动词或助动词时，则需根据人称和时态在该实义动词前加don’t, doesn’t或didn’t。同时把该实义动词变为原形。‎ ‎    He plays the violin well.（肯定）‎ ‎    He doesn’t play the violin well.（否定）‎ ‎    She won the game.（肯定）‎ ‎    She didn’t win the game.（否定）‎ ‎(3) 如果句子是there be结构或谓语动词是have（有），除了be和have之后加not之外，句中如果有some要变为any。例如：‎ There is some water in the cup. →There is not any water in the cup.‎ He has some books. →He has not any books.‎ ‎(4) 除not以外，否定词no, never, nothing, nobody, few等也可构成否定句。例如：‎ There is something wrong with his bike. →There is nothing wrong with his bike.‎ I have seen the film. →I have never seen the film.‎ 二. 祈使句的构成形式及基本用法 ‎    祈使句是用来表示命令、请求、建议、号召等的句子，谓语动词用原形，句末用感叹号“！”或句号“.”。朗读时一般用降调。‎ ‎1. 肯定的祈使句：‎ ‎（1）祈使句主语是you时，you常省略，但如果要特别强调对方或表达某种强烈的情绪时可以有主语或称呼语。‎ ‎    Be quiet. ‎ ‎    You be quiet!‎ ‎（2）“Do+祈使句”表示一种强烈的感情或请求，do起强调作用。‎ ‎    Do come back at once! ‎ ‎    Do be careful.‎ ‎（3）please用在祈使句中可以表示一种客气的语气，但please用在句末时，必须用逗号与其余部分分开。‎ ‎    Open the window, please.‎ ‎（4）Let引导祈使句时，后面需跟上人称代词或称呼语，人称代词一般只用第一、第三人称。‎ ‎    Let Jack wait a minute. ‎ ‎    Let’s go to school.‎ ‎（5）在祈使句中，Let’s和 Let us是有区别的。Let’s包括说话者，而Let us不包括听话者在内。这点从反意疑问句时可明显看出。‎ ‎    Let’s go skating, shall we?（表示内部的建议）‎ ‎    Let us try again, will you?（表示向别人发出请求）‎ ‎ 2. 否定祈使句通常以Don’t或Never开头。其结构通常是：“Don’t(Never)+动词原形+其他成分” 例如：‎ ‎ Don’t do that again!‎ ‎ Never leave today’s work for tomorrow!‎ ‎ Don’t be late next time!‎ 三. 一般疑问句、特殊疑问句、选择疑问句、反意疑问句的构成形式及基本用法 ‎1. 一般疑问句：‎ ‎  （1）一般疑问句的肯定形式 ‎    一般疑问句一般是指以助动词、情态动词、be动词或have（有）开始，通常要求以yes，或no来回答的疑问句，一般疑问句读时通常用升调。‎ ‎    Do you know Mr. Smith? ‎ ‎    Can you swim? ‎ ‎  （2）一般疑问句的否定结构 ‎    ① 在一般疑问句的否定结构中，把副词not放在一般疑问句的主语之后。但如果用not的简略形式-n’t，则须将-n’t与一般疑问句句首的be, have，助动词或情态动词写在一起。在实际运用中，一般都采用简略式。‎ ‎ Are you not a football fan?‎ ‎ Aren’t you a football fan?‎ ‎ Will she not like it?‎ ‎ Won’t she like it?‎ ‎     ② 与汉语不同的是，英语一般疑问句否定结构的答语是否定还是肯定，全由答语的否定或肯定来决定。若答语是肯定的，则用yes加肯定结构；若答语是否定的，则用no加否定结构。‎ ‎    Aren’t you a football fan? 你不是足球迷吗？‎ Yes, I am.‎ No, I am not.     Won’t she like it?   Yes, she will. 　 No, she won’t. ‎ ‎2. 特殊疑问句 特殊疑问句由“疑问代词或疑问副词+一般疑问句”构成，句子一般用倒装语序，但如果主语是疑问代词或由疑问代词修饰时，用陈述句的语序。特殊疑问句不能用yes或no回答，读时用降调。例如：‎ Who is on duty today? ‎ How long have you been in Beijing?‎ What time do you get up every morning?‎ What must I do now?‎ 常用的特殊疑问句 询问内容 ‎ 疑问词或句型 ‎ 例    句 ‎ 回   答 ‎ 职业，身份 ‎ what ‎ What is your father? ‎ He is a doctor. ‎ 姓名或关系 ‎ who ‎ Who is that boy? ‎ He is Jack. He is my brother ‎ 相貌特征 ‎ what…like? ‎ What is she like? What does she look like? ‎ She is beautiful. ‎ 目的 ‎ what…for? ‎ What did they come here for? ‎ To attend a meeting. ‎ 原因 ‎ why ‎ Why did they come here? ‎ Because they have a meeting to attend. ‎ 天气 ‎ ‎ how  what…like? ‎ How is the weather today? What is the weather like today? ‎ It’s fine. ‎ 颜色 ‎ what color…？ ‎ What dolor is her skirt? ‎ It’s red. ‎ 服装尺寸 ‎ what size ‎ What size does he wear? ‎ He wars 40. ‎ 几点钟 ‎ what time ‎ What time is it? ‎ It’s 7:30. ‎ 星期几 ‎ what day ‎ What day is today? ‎ It’s Tuesday. ‎ 几号，日期 ‎ what is the date…? ‎ What is the date today? ‎ It’s May 2. ‎ 年龄（多大） ‎ how old ‎ How old is he? ‎ He is 38. ‎ 持续多长时间（多久） ‎ how long ‎ How long have you been here? ‎ For five months. ‎ 长度（多长） ‎ how long ‎ How long is the bridge? ‎ It’s 500 metres. ‎ 距离（多远） ‎ how far ‎ How far is it from here to the zoo? ‎ It’s 6 kilometres. ‎ 频度 （多经常） ‎ how often ‎ How often do you come back? ‎ Once a week. ‎ 时间经过 （多快） ‎ how soon ‎ How soon will she arrive? ‎ In an week. ‎ 数量 （多少） ‎ how many（可数名词） how much（不可数名词） ‎ How many jackets do you have? How much coffee do you want? ‎ Three. Two cups. ‎ 价格 ‎ how much ‎ How much is it? How much does it cost? ‎ Five dollars. ‎ 高度 （多高） ‎ how tall（人，树） how high（山，建筑物） ‎ How tall is she? How high is the tower? ‎ She’s 1.73 metres. It’s 450 metres. ‎ ‎3. 选择疑问句：‎ ‎    选择疑问句是说话者提出两种或两种以上的不同情况，让对方选择回答的疑问句。其结构是“疑问句+选择部分”。选择部分由or连接，or前面的部分读升调，or后面的部分读降调。‎ ‎    选择疑问句不能用yes或no回答，而必须具体的选择答复。‎ ‎    Is your bag yellow or black?  It’s black.。‎ ‎    Would you like some tea or coffee?  Either will do.。‎ ‎    Which do you like better, singing or dancing?   I like dancing better.‎ ‎4. 反意疑问句：‎ ‎    反意疑问句是指在陈述句之后附加一个意思与之相反的简短问句，问对方是否赞同的疑问句。附加问句的否定式必须缩写。‎ ‎（1）肯定的陈述句后跟否定的附加问句，否定的陈述句后跟肯定的附加问句。‎ ‎    I am your teacher, aren’t I? ‎ ‎    He didn’t study hard, did he?‎ ‎（2）如果陈述句中含有否定副词never（从不，决不），hardly（几乎不）或其他表示否定代词或形容词，如nothing, none no one, nobody, neither, few, little等，则附加问句只能用肯定式。如：‎ ‎   They hardly write to each other, do they? ‎ ‎   He has found nothing, has he?‎ ‎   Few people knew the secret, did they? ‎ ‎（3）当反意疑问句是“否定陈述句+肯定附加问句”时，英语与汉语的回答习惯存在差异。英语回答时只看实际情况，若答语的具体内容是肯定的就用“Yes+肯定结构”，答语的具体内容是否定的就用“No+否定结构”，而译成汉语时，则必须把yes译“不是”，把no译成“是的”。‎ ‎  ---You won’t be away for long, will you? 你不会离开太久，是吗？‎ ‎　　 ---Yes, I will.不，我会离开很久。  ‎ ‎---No, I won’t.是的，我不会离开很久。‎ ‎　　 ---I don’t think she’ll come by bike, will she? 我认为她不会骑自行车，会吗？‎ ‎　　 ---Yes, she will.不，她会骑自行车来。  ‎ ‎---No, she won’t.是的，她不会骑自行车来。‎ 四. 由what, how引导的感叹句的构成形式、用法及区别 ‎　　感叹句是表示喜、怒、哀、乐以及惊异等感情的句子。句末用感叹号“！”，读时用降调，感叹句往往由what或how引导，what修饰名词，how修饰形容词，副词或动词。‎ ‎1. what引导的感叹句：‎ ‎　（1）what + a/an +形容词+单数可数名词+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　What a beautiful city it is!‎ ‎　　　What an interesting story she told! ‎ ‎　（2）what+形容词+复数可数名词/不可数名词+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　What expensive watches they are! ‎ ‎　　　What terrible weather it is! ‎ ‎2．How引导的感叹句：‎ ‎　（1）How+形容词/副词+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　How cold it is! ‎ ‎   　 How hard he works! ‎ ‎　（2）How+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　How he loves his son!　　　‎ How I miss you!‎ ‎　（3）How+形容词+a/an+单数可数名词+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　How tall a tree it is! ‎ ‎（4）上述两种感叹句可以互相转换。例如：‎ What a clever boy he is!→How clever the boy is!‎ What a cold day it is!→How cold it is!‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (2004年上海徐汇区中考试题)‎ ‎ _________ useful computer it is!‎ ‎ A. What B. What a C. What an D. How ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是感叹句的结构。这个感叹句的中心词是一单数可数名词computer, 所以要用what来修饰，又因为useful第一个发音是辅音，what之后的不定冠词用a,而不用an。‎ ‎2. (2004年嘉兴市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---________ is it from Jiaxing to Hangzhou?‎ ‎ ---I’m not sure, but it takes about ninety minutes to get there by bus.‎ ‎ A. How many B. How often C. How much D. How far ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是特殊疑问句疑问词的选择。问话者是在问距离，所以应用how far来提问。‎ ‎3. (2004年河北省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---_______ will it take us to get there by bus?‎ ‎ ---About two hours.‎ ‎ A. How soon B. How often C. How long D. How quick ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是特殊疑问句疑问词的选择。问话者是在问时间，所以应用how long来提问。‎ ‎4. (2004年长沙市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Help! There is a snake near the house.‎ ‎ ---________ afraid. It will go away later.‎ ‎ A. Don’t B. Not C. Don’t be D. Be ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是祈使句的结构。祈使句的否定结构是：“Don’t(Never)+动词原形+其他成分” 符合这一要求的只有C。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎ 1. ---Excuse me, _______ is the nearest bookshop?‎ ‎ ---Go down the street and turn left at the second corner.‎ ‎ A. how B. what C. where D. who ‎ 2. ---______ is it from our school to the Bell‎ ‎Tower?‎ ‎ ---About half an hour’s bus ride. Shall we go and visit it?‎ ‎ A. How long B. How often C. How far D. How much ‎ 3. ---Linda had nothing for breakfast this morning, _______?‎ ‎ ---No. She got up too late.‎ ‎ A. had she B. hadn’t she C. did she D. didn’t she ‎ 4. ---The room is so dirty. ______ we clean it?‎ ‎ ---Of course.‎ ‎ A. Will B. Would C. Do D. Shall ‎ 5. ---__________, sir?‎ ‎ ---Size 41, I think ‎ A. What size do you need B. What can I do for you ‎ C. How do you like this shirt D. What’s the matter with you ‎ 6. ---_______ good weather! Why not go out for a walk?‎ ‎ A. What B. How C. What a D. How a ‎ 7. ---It’s a nice car. ______ have you been in it?‎ ‎ ---Just to Shanghai.‎ ‎ A. How much B. How long C. How soon D. How far ‎ 8. ---_______ to the United States?‎ ‎ ---No, never, but I went to Canada a few years ago.‎ ‎ A. Have you been B. Have you gone ‎ C. Did you go D. Will you go ‎ 9. ---_______ were you away from school last year?‎ ‎ ---About two weeks.‎ ‎ A. How often B. How soon C. How long D. When ‎ 10. ---______ do you want?‎ ‎ ---I want a CD of popular songs.‎ ‎ A. Which CD B. How many CDs ‎ C. What CD D. How much ‎ 11. _______ is your mother, a teacher or a doctor?‎ ‎ A. What B. Which C. Who D. whose ‎ 12. ---______ is your mother today, Jim?‎ ‎ ---She is much better.‎ ‎ A. How B. What C. Where D. How old ‎ 13. ---______he ______ at this school last term?‎ ‎ ---Yes, I think so.‎ ‎ A. Did…study B. Does…study ‎ C. Was…study D. Did…studied ‎ 14. ---_______ did you begin to learn English?‎ ‎ ---Three years ago.‎ ‎ A. When B. Why C. Where D. What ‎ 15. ---________ do you write to your pen-friend?‎ ‎ ---Once a week.‎ ‎ A. How long B. How soon C. How far D. How often ‎ 16. _______ nice flowers! Where did you pick them?‎ ‎ A. How B. What C. What a D. How a ‎ 17. The sick man’s allowed to take a walk in the garden every day, _______?‎ ‎ A. is he B. isn’t he C. has he D. hasn’t he ‎ 18. ______ cross the road before the traffic lights turn green.‎ ‎ A. Not B. Won’t C. Don’t D. Doesn’t ‎ 19. He found nothing in the room, _________?‎ ‎ A. doesn’t he B. does he ‎ C. didn’t he D. did he ‎ 20. You haven’t changed your mind, ________?‎ ‎ A. do you B. are you ‎ C. have you D. did you ‎ 二. 句型转换（按要求改写下列句子）‎ ‎1. Bruce bought a dictionary yesterday. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ Bruce ________ ________ a dictionary yesterday.‎ ‎2. Mr. Smith does morning exercises every day. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ________ Mr. Smith ______ morning exercises every day?‎ ‎3. Allan will go back to England by plane next month. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ________ _______ Allan go back to England next month?‎ ‎4. There are some apples on the table. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ There _______ _______ apples on the table.‎ ‎5. When she sees you, she will tell you the news(就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ ______ she tell you the news?‎ ‎6. Uncle Wang likes making things. (改写为否定句)‎ ‎ Uncle Wang _______ _______ making things.‎ ‎7. Ann returned the book to the library yesterday. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ________ Ann _______ the book to the library yesterday?‎ ‎8. Our city is very beautiful. (改为感叹句)‎ ‎ _______ _______ our city is!‎ ‎9. He has worked in this school for five years. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ _______ has he worked in this school?‎ ‎10. Both of them are my best friends. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ _______ of them _______ my best friend.‎ ‎11. They are happy to see each other. (改为感叹句)‎ ‎ _______ ______ they are to see each other!‎ ‎12. The exam begins at nine. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ________ the exam _______ at nine?‎ ‎13. He was playing basketball at four yesterday afternoon. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ ______ he ______ at four yesterday afternoon?‎ ‎14. He had nothing for breakfast. (改为反意疑问句)‎ ‎ He had nothing for breakfast ______ _______?‎ ‎15. She doesn’t think I can surf on the Internet. (改反意疑问句)‎ ‎ She doesn’t think I can surf on the Internet, _______ _______?‎ ‎16. He’s put the tree in the hole? (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ______ he ______ the tree in the hole?‎ ‎17. How useful the book is! (改为陈述句)‎ ‎ It is ______ ______ useful book.‎ ‎18. The population of Australia is about 19,500,000. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ ______ population of Australia?‎ ‎19. The meeting will start in ten minutes. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ ______ will the meeting start?‎ ‎20. Don’t tell him to come to my office. (改为肯定的祈使句)‎ ‎ ______ ______ to come to my office.‎ 三. 句子翻译:根据所给汉语完成英语句子，每空一词。 ‎1. 我母亲通常在星期日打扫卫生，洗衣服。 My mother usually _________ some cleaning and __________ on Sundays. ‎2. 在今晚的聚会上我们肯定会玩得痛快。 We’re __________ to have __________ at the party this evening. ‎3. 你看明天有可能结束这项工作吗? Do you think _________ ________to finish the work tomorrow? ‎4. 你怎样与你的邻居相处好? ‎________can you get on well ________ your neighbours?‎ ‎5. 西安的新变化使参观者们感到惊奇。 The _________ are __________ at the new changes in Xi’an. ‎6. 天冷了，请穿上暖和的衣服。 It’s cold. Please _______ _______ warm clothes.‎ ‎7. 爱迪生在小时候就对科学感兴趣。‎ Edison _______ _______ _______ science even when he was a small boy. ‎8. 尽管他失败了很多次，但他没有灰心。 Even though he had failed many times, he didn’t _______ ________.‎ ‎9. 无论发生什么事情，我都会和你在一起。 ‎___________happens, I’ll be with you. ‎10.楼上的噪音害得我整晚无法入睡。 The noises upstairs made me not able to _______ _______all night. ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.C 2.C 3.C 4.D 5.A 6.A 7.D 8.A 9.C 10.C 11.A 12.A 13.A 14.A 15.D 16.B 17.B 18.C 19.D 20.C 二. 1. didn’t buy 2.Does; do 3.How will 4.aren’t any 5.When will 6.doesn’t like 7.Did; return 8.How beautiful 9.How long 10.Neither; is 11.How happy 12.Does; begin 13.What was; doing 14.did he 15. does she 16.Has; put 17.such a 18.What’s the 19.How soon 29.Tell him 三. 1. does; washing 2. sure; fun 3. it/ it’s possible 4. How; with 5. visitors; amazed/ surprised 6.put on 7. was interested in 8. lose heart 9. Whatever 10. fall asleep ‎（8）宾语从句考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 八、宾语从句 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 中考对宾语从句的考查主要集中在以下几个方面：‎ ‎1. 引导宾语从句的连词和代词选择；‎ ‎2. 宾语从句的语序；‎ ‎3. 宾语从句的时态。‎ 考查的主要形式是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。阅读理解和书面表达肯定也要用到宾语从句。‎ ‎【名师精讲】‎ 一. 宾语从句的种类 宾语从句是一种名词性从句，在句中作及物动词的宾语，或介词的宾语，或 形容词的宾语。根据引导宾语从句的不同连词，宾语从句可分为三类。‎ ‎1. 由that引导的宾语从句。That只有语法作用，没有实在的意义，在口语 和非正式文体中可以省略。例如：‎ He said (that) he wanted to stay at home.‎ She doesn’t know (that) she is seriously ill.‎ I am sure (that) he will succeed.‎ ‎2. 由连接代词who, whom, whose, what, which和连接副词when, where, why, how引导的宾语从句。这些连接代词和连接副词在宾语从句中充当某个成分。例如：‎ Do you know who (whom) they are waiting foe?‎ He asked whose handwriting was the best.‎ Can you tell me where the No.3 bus stop is?‎ I don’t know why the train is late.‎ ‎3. 由if或whether引导的宾语从句。If和whether在句中的意思是“是否”。例如：‎ I want to know if (whether) he lives there.‎ He asked me whether (if) I could help him.‎ 二. 宾语从句的语序 宾语从句的语序应为陈述句的语序。例如：‎ I hear (that) physics isn’t easy.‎ I think (that) you will like this school soon.‎ Can you tell me how I can get to zoo?‎ Please tell me when we’ll have the meeting.‎ 三. 宾语从句的时态 ‎1. 如果主句的时态是一般现在时，宾语从句该用什麽时态就用什麽时态。‎ 如：‎ I don’t think (that) you are right.‎ Please tell us where he is.‎ Can you tell me how I can get to the railway station?‎ ‎2. 如果主句的时态是一般过去时，宾语从句只能用相应的过去时态（一般过去时， 过去进行时， 过去将来时，过去完成时）。例如：‎ He asked what time it was.‎ He told me that he was preparing for the sports meet.‎ He asked if you had written to Peter.‎ He said that he would go back to the U.S. soon.‎ ‎3. 如果宾语从句所陈述的是客观真理，其时态常用一般现在时。例如：‎ Our teacher said that January is the first month of the year.‎ Scientists have proved that the earth turns around the sun.‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎1. (2004年北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ Miss Green didn’t tell us _______ in 2002.‎ ‎ A. where does she live B. Where she lives ‎ C. where did she live D. where she lived ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是宾语从句的语序和时态。宾语从句应用陈述句的语序和时态，所以应选D。‎ ‎2. (2004年上海市徐汇区中考试题)‎ ‎ Would you please tell me ________?‎ ‎ A. when did he come home ‎ B. where he would play football ‎ C. if he had seen the film ‎ D. why he didn’t watch the game ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是宾语从句的语序和时态。主句用的实际上是现在时，宾语从句在这个句子里应用陈述句的语序和一般过去时。‎ ‎3. (2004年哈尔滨市中考试题)‎ ‎ I don’t know when __________.‎ ‎ A. will the train leave B. the train will leave ‎ C. would the train leave D. the train leave ‎ 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是宾语从句的语序和时态。只有B在语序和时态上符合要求。‎ ‎4. (2004年常州市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---We don’t know _____________.‎ ‎ ---It is said that he was born in Sweden.‎ ‎ A. what he is B. if he lives here ‎ C. where he comes from D. which country is he from ‎ 【解析】答案: C。该题考查的是宾语从句的语序。按照他们谈论的话题可知：他们说的是某人是哪里人。A和B可以排除掉。D的语序不对，只有C正确。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1. Do you know _______ during the coming summer holiday?‎ ‎ A. what will Tom do B. what did Tom do ‎ C. what Tom will do D. what Tom did ‎2. I want to know_________.‎ ‎ A. what is his name B. what’s his name ‎ C. that his name is D. what his name is ‎3. Do you know ________ I could pass the exam?‎ ‎ A. that B. whether C. what D. which ‎4. Jim doesn’t understand ____________.‎ ‎ A. which is the way to the museum ‎ B. why his wife always goes shopping ‎ C. what is the way to the museum ‎ D. why does she always go shopping ‎5. ---Could you tell me ______ she is looking for?‎ ‎ A. that B. whose C. who D. which ‎6. Mr. King didn’t know _______ yesterday evening.‎ ‎ A. when does his son come home ‎ B. when his son comes home ‎ C. when did his son come home ‎ D. when his son came home ‎7. Could you tell me _______ the bike this morning?‎ ‎ A. how does he mend B. how he mends ‎ C. how he mended D. how did he mend ‎8. ---I’m waiting for the mail. Do you know ________ it will arrive?‎ ‎ ---Usually it comes by 4: 00.‎ ‎ A. how B. where C. when D. what ‎9. ---Excuse me, would you please tell me ________?‎ ‎ ---Certainly. Go straight along here. It’s next to a hospital.‎ ‎ A. how we can get to the post office ‎ B. how can we get to the post office ‎ C. how get to the post office ‎ D. how could we get to the post office ‎10. ---Can I help you?‎ ‎ ---Yes. I’d like a ticket to Mount Emei. Can you tell me ______ take to get there?‎ ‎ A. how soon will it B. how soon it will ‎ C. how long it will D. how long will it ‎11. He wanted to know ___________.‎ ‎ A. whether he speaks at the meeting ‎ B. when the meeting would start ‎ C. what he’s going to do at the meeting ‎ D. where would the meeting be held ‎ ‎12. ---Could you tell me _________ the Bamboo Garden?‎ ‎ ---The day after tomorrow, I think.‎ ‎ A. when will you visit B. when you will visit ‎ C. when would you visit D. when you would visit ‎13. Would you please tell me _________ next, Mr Wang?‎ ‎ A. what should we do B. we should do what ‎ C. what we should do D. should we do what ‎14. You can’t imagine _________ when they received these nice Christmas presents.‎ ‎ A. how they were excited B. how excited they were ‎ C. how excited were they D. they were how excited ‎15. I want to know ________ you will come back at 8:00 tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. that B. when C. where D. whether ‎16. ---Could you tell me ____________?‎ ‎ ---Sorry, I don’t know. I was not at the meeting.‎ ‎ A. what does he say at the meeting ‎ B. what did he say at the meeting ‎ C. what he says at the meeting ‎ D. what he said at the meeting ‎17. ---Could you tell me _________ last night?‎ ‎ ---Er, I was watching Euro 2004 at home.‎ ‎ A. what you were doing B. what were you doing ‎ C. what you are doing D. what are you doing ‎18. The teacher asked the students __________.‎ ‎ A. if they were interested in dinosaurs ‎ B. when was Albert Einstein born ‎ C. what they will do with the computers ‎ D. how many trees they have planted ‎19. Every morning the patients are asked if ________ their temperature taken.‎ ‎ A. they had had B. have they had ‎ C. they have had D. had they had ‎20. It’s up to you to decide _______ you’ll go there, by air or by road.‎ ‎ A. how B. why C. that D. when 二. 根据汉语句子的意思完成下列英语句子 ‎1. 李明说他对玩电脑游戏感兴趣。‎ ‎ Li Ming says _______ _______ interested in playing computer games.‎ ‎2. 我认为玛丽不回来了。‎ ‎ I don’t think Mary ______ ______.‎ ‎3. 山姆给我说他准备去上海。‎ ‎ Sam told me that he _______ _______ for Shanghai.‎ ‎4. 请你告诉我去钟楼怎麽走吗？‎ ‎ Could you tell me _______ I can get to the Bell Tower?‎ ‎5. 父亲说他买了一台新电脑。‎ ‎ Father said that he ________ ________ a new computer..‎ ‎6. 我想知道今天晚上还有没有去北京的火车。‎ ‎ I want to know _________ there is a train to Beijing.‎ ‎7. 你知道一个双人间多少钱吗？‎ ‎ Do you know ______ _______ a double room ______?‎ ‎8. 请你告诉我我们外出多长时间好吗？‎ ‎ Could you tell me ______ ______ we’re going to be away?‎ ‎9. 叔叔说他正在写一本新小说。‎ ‎ Uncle said that he ______ _______ a new novel.‎ ‎10. 杰克说他有重要事情要做。‎ ‎ Jack said he _______ something important to do.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.C 2.D 3.B 4.B 5.C 6.D 7.C 8.C 9.A 10.C 11.B 12.B 13.C 14.B 15.D 16.D 17.A 18.A 19.C 20.A 二. 1.he is 2.will come 3.was leaving 4.how 5.had bought 6.if (whether) 7.how much 8.how long 9.was writing 10.had ‎（9）状语从句的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 九、状语从句 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1. 时间状语从句 ‎2. 条件状语从句 ‎3. 原因状语从句 ‎4. 结果状语从句 ‎5. 比较状语从句 ‎6. 目的状语从句 ‎7. 让步状语从句 ‎8. 地点状语从句 ‎【名师点睛】‎ 用来修饰主句中的动词，副词和形容词的从句叫状语从句。根据其含义状语从句可分为时间状语从句，地点状语从句，条件状语从句， 原因状语从句，结果状语从句，比较状语从句，目的状语从句，让步状语从句。‎ ‎1. 时间状语从句 ‎(1)时间状语从句常用when, as, while, before, after, since, till, until, as soon as等连词来引导。例如：‎ It was raining hard when got to school yesterday.‎ While he was doing his homework, the telephone rang.‎ As he walked along the lake, he sang happily.‎ He had learned a little Chinese before he came to China.‎ After he finished middle school, he went to work in a factory.‎ ‎(2)在时间状语从句里，通常不用将来时态，用现在时态表示将来的动作或状态。例如：‎ I’ll ring you up as soon as I get to New York.‎ I will tell him everything when he comes back.‎ He won’t believe it until he sees it with his own eyes.‎ ‎(3)在带有till或until引导的时间状语从句的主从复合句里，如果主句用肯定式，其含义是“一直到……时”，谓语动词只能用延续性动词。如果主句用否定式，其含义是“直到……才……”, “在……以前不……”, 谓语动词可用瞬间动词。例如：‎ The young man read till the light went out.‎ Let’s wait until the rain stops.‎ ‎ We won’t start until Bob comes.‎ ‎ Don’t get off until the bus stops.‎ ‎2. 条件状语从句 ‎(1)条件状语从句通常由if, unless引导。例如：‎ What shall we do if it snows tomorrow?‎ Don’t leave the building unless I tell you to.‎ ‎(2)在条件状语从句里，谓语动词通常用现在时态表示将来的动作或状态。例如：‎ I’ll help you with your English if am free tomorrow.‎ He won’t be late unless he is ill.‎ ‎(3)“祈使句 + and (or)+ 陈述句” 在意思上相当于一个带有条件状语从句的复合句。例如：‎ Hurry up, or you’ll be late.‎ ‎=If you don’t hurry up, you’ll be late.‎ Study hard and you will pass the exam.‎ ‎=If you study hard, you will pass the exam.‎ ‎3. 原因状语从句 ‎(1)原因状语从句通常由because, since, as引导。例如：‎ He didn’t come to school because he was ill.‎ As it is raining, we shall not go the zoo.‎ Since you can’t answer the question, I’ll ask someone else.‎ ‎(2)because表示直接原因，语气最强。Because引导的原因状语从句多放在主句之后。回答由why提出的问题，只能用because。As和since语气较弱，一般用来表示明显的原因。由as和since引导的原因状语从居多放在句首。例如：‎ ‎------Why aren’t going there?‎ ‎------Because I don’t want to.‎ As he has no car, he can’t get there easily.‎ Since we have no money, we can’t buy it.‎ ‎(3)because和so不能同用在一个句子里。‎ ‎4. 结果状语从句 ‎(1)结果状语从句由so…that, such…that, so that引导。例如：‎ He is so poor that he can’t buy a bike for his son.‎ She is such a good teacher that everybody likes her.‎ My pencil fell under the desk, so that I couldn’t see it.‎ ‎(2)so…that语such...that可以互换。例如：‎ 在由so...that引导的结果状语从句中，so是副词，与形容词连用。其结构是: “...so + 形容词（副词）+ that + 从句”。例如：‎ He was so glad that he couldn’t say a word.‎ The hall is so big that it can hold 2,000 people.‎ Mother lives so far away that we hardly ever see her.‎ 在由such…that引导的结果状语从句中，such是形容词，它修饰的可以是单数或复数可数名词，也可以是不可数名词；名词前面可以带形容词，也可不带。如果是单数可数名词，前面需加不定冠词a或an。例如：‎ It was such a hot day that nobody wanted to do anything.‎ He had such long arms that he could almost touch the ceiling.‎ He made such rapid progress that he did very well in the mid-term.‎ ‎ 有时上述两种结构是可以互换的。例如：‎ It was such a wonderful film that all of us wanted to see it again.‎ ‎=The film was so wonderful that all of us wanted to see it again.‎ It is such an important match that nobody wants to miss it.‎ ‎=The match is so important that nobody wants to miss it.‎ ‎(3)如果名词前由many, much, little, few等词修饰时，只能用so, 不用such。例如：‎ Soon there were so many deer that they ate up all the wild roses.‎ He has so little time that he can’t go to the cinema with you.‎ ‎5. 比较状语从句 比较状语从句通常由as…as, 比较级 + than…等连词引导。例如：‎ Tom runs faster than John does.‎ This classroom is as big as that one.‎ ‎6. 目的状语从句 ‎(1)目的状语从句通常由 so that, in order that引导。例如：‎ We started early so that we could catch the first train.‎ He studies hard so that he could work better in the future.‎ We used the computer in order that we might save time.‎ ‎(2)so that既可引导目的状语从句，又可引导结果状语从句。区别这两种从句的办法有两个：1)目的状语从句里往往带有情态动词can, could, may, might等。2)从意思上看，目的状语从句往往表示的目的很明确。例如：‎ Speak clearly so that they may understand you. (目的状语从句)‎ Jack is badly ill so that he has to rest. (结果状语从句)‎ ‎7. 让步状语从句 ‎(1)让步状语从句通常由although, though等连词引导。例如：‎ Though he is young, he knows a lot.‎ Although I am tired, I must go on working.‎ ‎(2)although(though)不能用在同一个句子中。例如：‎ 我们不能说：Though it was raining hard, but he still went out.‎ 应该说：Though it was raining hard, he still went out.或It was raining hard, but he still went out.‎ ‎8. 地点状语从句 ‎ 地点状语从句常常由where来引导。例如：‎ ‎ Go where you like.‎ ‎ Where there is a will, there is a way.‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (2004年北京市海淀区中考试题)‎ ‎ You will stay healthy _______ you do more exercise, such as running and walking.‎ ‎ A. if B. how C. before D. where ‎ 答案：A。该题考查的是引导状语从句的从属连词的选择。从意思上看，从句应是一个条件状语从句，在这四个选项中只有if能引导条件状语从句，所以选A。‎ ‎2. (2004年江西省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Shall we go on working?‎ ‎ ---Yes, _________ I prefer to have a rest.‎ ‎ A. when B. if C. because D. though ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是引导状语从句的从属连词的选择。从意思上看，只有选though才能说得通。‎ ‎3. (2004年徐州市中考试题)‎ ‎ None of us knew what had happened _________ they told us about it.‎ ‎ A. when B. until C. after D. though ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是引导状语从句的从属连词选择。本句的意思是“在……以前我们没人知道这件事。”要表达着一意思应用“not…until” 这一句型。‎ ‎4. (2004年泉州市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---I hope you’ll enjoy your trip, dear!‎ ‎ ---Thank you, mum. I’ll give you a call _________ I get there.‎ ‎ A. until B. as soon as C. since D. till ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是引导状语从句的从属连词的选择。本题的意思是“一到那里，我就给你打电话。”要表达这个意思应选用as soon as。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1. _______ he’s old, he can still carry this heavy bag.‎ ‎ A. Though B. Since C. For D. So ‎2. ---Do you know if he _______ to play basket ball with us?‎ ‎ ---I think he will come if he ______ free tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. comes; is B. comes; will be C. will come; is D. will come; will be ‎3. In the zoo if a child _____ into the water and can’t swim, the dolphins may come up ______ him.‎ ‎ A. will fall; to help B. falls; to help ‎ C. will fall; help D. falls; helping ‎4. I don’t remember ________ he worked in that city when he was young.‎ ‎ A. what B. which C. where D. who ‎5. We will stay at home if my aunt ________ to visit us tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. comes B. come C. will come D. is coming ‎6. The police asked the children _______ cross the street ________ the traffic lights turned green.‎ ‎ A. not; before B. don’t; when C. not to; until D. not; after ‎7. I was late for class yesterday _______ there was something wrong with my bike.‎ ‎ A. when B. that C. until D. because ‎8. I’ll go swimming with you if I ________ free tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. will be B. shall be C. am D. was ‎9. In the exam, the ________ you are, ______ the _______ mistakes you will make.‎ ‎ A. careful; little B. more careful; fewest ‎ C. more careful; fewer D. more careful; less ‎10. You should finish your lessons _______ you go out to paly.‎ ‎ A. before B. after C. when D. while ‎11. I hurried _____ I wouldn’t be late for class.‎ ‎ A. since B. so that C. as if D. unless ‎12. When you read the book, you’d better make a mark _______ you have any questions.‎ ‎ A. which B. that C. where D. though ‎13. The teacher raised his voice _______ all the students could hear him.‎ ‎ A. for B. so that C. because D. in order ‎14. He took off his coat _______ he felt hot.‎ ‎ A. because B. as C. if D. since ‎15. It is ______ that we’d like to go out for a walk.‎ ‎ A. a lovely day B. too lovely a day ‎ C. so lovely a day D. such lovely a day ‎16. Mary had ______ much work to do that she stayed at her office all day.‎ ‎ A. such B. so C. too D. very ‎17. _______ I felt very tired, I tried to finish the work.‎ ‎ A. Although B. Because C. As D. As if ‎18. ______ the day went on, the weather got worse.‎ ‎ A. With B. Since C. While D. As ‎19. ______ well you can drive, you must drive carefully.‎ ‎ A. So long as B. In order that ‎ C. No matter how D. The moment ‎20. Write to me as soon as you ________ to Beijing.‎ ‎ A. will get B. get C. getting D. got 二. 根据中文意思完成下列英语句子 ‎1. 不管他跟我开什麽玩笑，我都不生气。‎ ‎ I am not angry with him, _______ _______ ______ jokes he ______ on me.‎ ‎2. 布鲁斯太太对学生非常亲切，以至于学生把她当做母亲。‎ ‎ Mrs Bruce was _______ kind to her students ______ they ______ her _____ their mother.‎ ‎3. 只要我们竭尽全力，父母就会满意我们的表现。‎ ‎ Our parents will be pleased with our performance _____ _____ ______ we try our best.‎ ‎4. 你一到上海就给我打个电话好吗？‎ ‎ Will you please call me ______ ______ ______ you get to Shanghai.‎ ‎5. 这个七岁的女孩酷爱钢琴，以至于他已经坚持练习两年了。‎ ‎ The seven-year-old girl likes playing the piano ______ ______ ______ she has kept ‎ practicing for two years.‎ ‎6. 虽然她很忙，他还坚持自学英语。‎ ‎ _______ _______ ______ _______, she kept on learning English by herself.‎ ‎7. 他长大后相当一名记者。‎ ‎ He wants to be a journalist ______ _______ _______ _______.‎ ‎8. 无论刮风下雨，我们的老师总是第一个到校。‎ ‎_______ _______ windy or rainy, our teacher is always the first to get to school.‎ ‎9. 如果人人为保护环境做出贡献，世界将会变得更美好。‎ ‎ ______ ______ ______ _____ _______ to protecting the environment, the world will become much more beautiful.‎ ‎10. 李明昨天没来上学，因为他病了。‎ ‎ Li Ming didn’t come to school _______ _______ ______ ______.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.A 2‎‎.C 3.B 4.C 5.A 6.C 7.D 8.C 9.C 10.A 11.B 12.C 13.B 14.A 15.C 16.B 17.A 18.D 19.C 20.B 二. 1. no matter what; plays 2.so; that; regarded; as 3. as long as 4. as long as 5. so much that 6. Though she was busy 7. when he grows up 8.Whether it’s 9. If everyone makes a contribution 10. because he was ill ‎（10）定语从句的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十、定语从句 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 中考对定语从句的考查主要集中在以下几个方面：‎ ‎1．定语从句的功用和结构 ‎2．关系代词和关系副词的功用 ‎3．各个关系代词和关系副词的具体用法 考查的主要形式是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。阅读理解和书面表达肯定也要用到定语从句。‎ ‎【名师精讲】 ‎ 一. 定语从句的功用和结构 ‎ 在复合句中，修饰某一名词或代词的从句叫做定语从句。被定从句修饰的词叫做先行词。定语从句必须放在先行词之后。引导定语从句的关联词有关系代词和关系副词。例如：‎ This is the present that he gave me for my birthday.‎ Do you know everybody who came to the party?‎ I still remember the night when I first came to the village?‎ This is the place where Chairman Mao once lived.‎ 二. 关系代词和关系副词的功用 ‎ 关系代词和关系副词用来引导定于从句，在先行词和定语从句之间起纽带作用，使二者联系起来。关系代词和关系副词又在定语从句中充当一个成分。关系待客做主语，宾语，定语，关系副词可作状语。‎ ‎1. 作主语：关系代词在定语从句中作主语时，从句的谓语动词的人称和数须和先行词一致。例如：‎ I don’t like people who talk much but do little.‎ The cars which are produced in Hubei Province sell very well.‎ ‎2. 作宾语：‎ She is the person that I met at the school gate yesterday.‎ The book that my grandmother gave me is called “The Great Escape”.‎ ‎3. 作定语 关系代词whose在定语从句中作定语用。例如：‎ What’s the name of the young man whose sister is a doctor?‎ The girl whose father is a teacher studies very hard.‎ ‎4. 作状语 I’ll never forget the day when I first came to Beijing.‎ This is the house where I was born.‎ 三. 各个关系代词和关系副词的具体用法 ‎1. who 指人，在定语从句中作主语。例如：‎ The person who broke the window must pay for it.‎ The boy who is wearing the black jacket is very clever.‎ ‎2. whom指人，在定语从句中作宾语。例如：‎ Do you know the young man (whom) we met at the gate？‎ Mr Lee (whom) you want to see has come.‎ ‎3. whose 指人，在定语从句中作定语。例如：‎ The girl whose mother is ill is staying at home today.‎ I know the boy whose father is a professor.‎ ‎4. which指物，在定语从中作主语或宾语。例如：‎ A dictionary is a book which gives the meaning of words.‎ Here is the book (which) the teacher mentioned yesterday.‎ ‎5. that多指物，有时也指人，在定语从句中作主语或宾语。例如：‎ I’ve read the newspaper that(which) carries the important news.‎ Who is the person that is reading the newspaper over there?‎ ‎6. when 指时间，在定语从句中作状语。例如：‎ ‎ I’ll never forget the time when we worked on the farm.‎ ‎ He arrived in Beijing on the day when I left.‎ ‎7. where 指地点，在定语从句中作状语。例如：‎ ‎ This is the house where we lived last year.‎ ‎ The factory where his father works is in the east of the city.‎ 四. 关系代词 whom， which 在定语从句中作介词宾语时，可以和介词一起放于先行词与定语从句之间，有时为了关系紧凑也可以将 whom 与 which 与先行词紧挨着书写，而将介词置于定语从句的后面，如： That was the room in which we had lived for ten years. = That was the room ‎ which we had lived in for ten years. ‎ 五. 具体使用时还要注意下列问题：‎ ‎1. 只能使用that,不用which 的情况：‎ ‎(1) 先行词是all, few, little, nothing, everything, anything 等不定代词时。例如：‎ ‎ All that he said is true. ‎ ‎ (2) 先行词被only, no, any, all,等词修饰时。例如：‎ ‎ He is the only foreigner that has been to that place. ‎ ‎(3) 先行词是序数词或被序数词修饰的词。例如：‎ He was the second (person) that told me the secret.‎ ‎(4) 先行词是形容词最高级或被形容词最高级修饰的词。‎ This is the best book (that) I have read this year.‎ ‎(5) 先行词既包括人又包括物时。例如：‎ He talked about the people and the things he remembered.‎ ‎2. 只能用which，不用that 的情况：‎ ‎(1) 在非限制性定语从中。例如：‎ ‎ The meeting was put off, which was exactly what we wanted.‎ ‎ (2) 定语从句由介词+关系代词引导，先行词是物时。例如：‎ ‎ The thing about which he is talking is of great importance.‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎1. (2004年哈尔滨中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Does the teacher know everybody _______ planted the trees?‎ ‎ ---Yes, he does.‎ ‎ A. which B. whose C. where D. who ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是引导定语从句的关系代词的选择。因为先行词是人，而关系代词又在定语从句中作主语，所以只有who合适。‎ ‎2. (2004年常州市中考试题)‎ ‎ The letter _______ I received from him yesterday is very important.‎ ‎ A. who B. where C. what D. that ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是定语从句的关系代词的选择。因为先行词是物，而关系代词在定语从句中作宾语，所以只有that合适。‎ ‎3. (2004年扬州市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Where is the scientist ________ gave us the talk yesterday?‎ ‎ ---He has gone back to Qinghua University.‎ ‎ A. whom B. who C. whose D. which ‎ 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是引导定语从句的关系代词的选择。因为先行词是人，而关系代词又在定语从句中作主语，所以只有who合适。‎ ‎4. (2004年益阳市中考试题)‎ I hate people _______ talk much but do little.‎ ‎ A. whose B. whom C. which D. who ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是引导定语从句的关系代词的选择。因为先行词是人，而关系代词又在定语从句中作主语，所以只有who合适。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1. ---Who is the man _______ was talking to our English teacher?‎ ‎ ---Oh! It’s Mr Baker, our maths teacher.‎ ‎ A. he B. that C. whom D. which ‎2. I hate the people ________ don’t help others when they are in trouble.‎ ‎ A. who B. which C. they D. where ‎3. The foreigner _________ visited our school is from Canada.‎ ‎ A. which B. when C. who D. whom ‎4. George Mallory was an English school teacher _______ loved climbing.‎ ‎ A. who B. whom C. he D. which ‎5. This is the place     _____I have ever visited.‎ ‎  A. there       B. when      C. where       D. which ‎6. Nobody knows the reason ______ she didn’t come to the meeting.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. why D. when ‎7. The moon is a world ______ there is no life.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. where D. why ‎8. He has forgotten the day _______ he arrived.‎ ‎ A. when B. where C. that D. which ‎9. He still remembers the days ______ he spent with your family.‎ ‎ A. when B. where C. that D. on which ‎10. Mr. White, ______ car had been stolen, came to the policeman.‎ ‎ A. who B. that C. whose D. which ‎11. He got to the village _______ his family once lived before liberation.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. when D. where ‎12. This is the house _______ I want to buy.‎ ‎ A. in which B. that C. whose D. where ‎13. This is the house _______ our beloved Premier Zhou once lived and worked.‎ ‎ A. which B. that C. when D. where ‎14. He didn’t tell me the place _______ he was born.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. when D. where ‎15. He lived in a small village, ______ was a long way from the railway station.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. where D. when 二. 用关系代词或关系副词将下列每对句子连成一个复合句 ‎1. The boy is my younger brother. He was here a minute ago.‎ ‎2. The old man is a professor. He teaches chemistry in a college.‎ ‎3. Beijing Hotel is near Tian An Men Square. The foreign visitors live there.‎ ‎4. The woman is here now. You were talking about her.‎ ‎5. This is the hall. We listened to the report in it the other day.‎ ‎6. The car was going 90 miles an hour. The car just passed us.‎ ‎7. The man waved to us. The man was my uncle.‎ ‎8. I enjoyed reading the book. You gave me a book last week.‎ ‎9. I prefer the subject. The subject is science.‎ ‎10. I spoke to the man. The man is a professor.‎ 三. 用适当的关系代词或关系副词填空 ‎1. The house _______ we live in is very big.‎ ‎2. The boy ______ is wearing the black jacket is very clever.‎ ‎3. This is the present _____ he gave me for my birthday.‎ ‎4. The man _______ talked to you just now is an engineer.‎ ‎5. He talked about the teachers and schools _______ he had visited.‎ ‎6. There is nothing in the world _______ can frighten him.‎ ‎7. She wears a gold ring, _______ is very uncommon in our class.‎ ‎8. We visited a factory _______ makes toys for children.‎ ‎9. Is this the place _______ your father once lived?‎ ‎10. I’ll never forget the days _______ I joined the League.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.B 2.A 3.C 4.A 5.D 6.C 7.C 8.A 9.C 10.C 11.D 12.B 13.D 14.D 15.B 二. 1.The boy who was here a minute ago is my younger brother.‎ ‎2. The old man who teaches chemistry in a college is a professor.‎ ‎3. Beijing Hotel where the foreign visitors live is near Tian An Men Square.‎ ‎4. The woman whom you were talking about is here now.‎ ‎5. This is the hall where we listened to the report the other day.‎ ‎6. The car which just passed us was going 90 miles an hour.‎ ‎7. The man who waved us was my uncle.‎ ‎8. I enjoyed reading the book you gave me last week.‎ ‎9. The subject I prefer is science.‎ ‎10.The man I spoke to is a professor.‎ 三. 1.that/ which 2.who/ that 3.that/ which 4.who/ that 5.that 6.that 7.which 8.which/ that 9.where 10.when ‎（11）主谓一致的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十一、主谓一致 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1. 语法一致的原则 ‎2. 意义一致的原则 ‎3. 邻近一致的原则 ‎【名师点睛】‎ 谓语受主语支配，须和主语在人称和数上保持一致，这叫做主谓一致。主谓 一致一般遵循三条原则：语法一致原则，意义一致原则和就近一致原则。‎ ‎1. 语法一致的原则 ‎（1）以单数名词或代词，动词不定式短语作主语时，谓语动词要用单数;主语为复数时，谓语用复数，例如：‎ He goes to school early every morning.‎ The children are playing outside.‎ To work hard is necessary for a student.‎ ‎（2）由and或both……and连接的并列成分作主语时，谓语动词用复数。例如：‎ Both he and I are right.‎ Mr Black and Mrs Black have a son called Tom.‎ 但并列主语如果指的是同一人，同一事物或同一概念，谓语动词用单数。例如：‎ His teacher and friend is a beautiful girl.‎ ‎ The poet and writer has come.‎ ‎ （3）由and连接的并列单数主语之前如果分别由each, every修饰时，其谓语动词要用单数形式。例如：‎ ‎ In our country every boy and every girl has the right to receive education.‎ ‎ Each man and each woman is asked to help.‎ ‎（4）主语是单数时，尽管后面跟有 but ,except, besides, with 等介词短语，谓语动词仍用单数。例如：‎ The teacher with his students is going to visit the museum.‎ Nobody but two boys was late for class.‎ Bread and butter is a daily food in the west.‎ ‎（5） 一些只有复数形式的名词，如people, police, cattle, clothes等作主语时，谓语动词要用复数。例如：‎ A lot of people are dancing outside.‎ The police are looking for lost boy.‎ ‎ （6）由each, some, any, no, every 构成的复合代词作主语时，谓语动词都用单数。例如：‎ ‎ Is everybody ready?‎ ‎ Somebody is using the phone.‎ ‎ （7）有两部分构成的物体的名词，如glasses, shoes, trousers, chopsticks, scissors 等作主语时，谓语动词用复数。例如：‎ ‎ Where are my shoes? I can’t find them.‎ ‎ Your trousers are dirty. You’d better change them.‎ ‎ 如果这类名词前用了a pair of等，则往往用作单数，谓语动词的单复数形式往往取决于pair的单复数形式。例如：‎ ‎ Here are some new pairs of shoes.‎ ‎ My new pair of socks is on the bed.‎ ‎2. 意义一致的原则 ‎（1）表时间、距离、价格、度量衡等的名词作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数。例如：‎ Twenty years is not a long time.‎ Ten dollars is too dear.‎ ‎（2）有些集合名词，如family, team等作主语时，如作为一个整体看待，谓语动词用单数；如指其中每个成员，则用复数。例如：‎ My family is big one.‎ My family are watching TV.‎ ‎（3）不定代词由all, most, more, some, any, none作主语时，也要依这些代词表示的意义来决定谓语动词的单复数形式。如果代词代表复数可数名词，谓语动词用复数；如果代词代表单数可数名词或不可数名词，谓语动词用单数。例如：‎ All of the work has been finished.‎ All of the people have gone.‎ ‎ （4）疑问代词作主语时，其谓语动词也有两种情况：主语表示复数意义，谓语动词用复数；主语表示单数意义，则谓语动词用单数。例如：‎ ‎ Who is your brother?‎ ‎ Who are League members?‎ ‎ （5）“分数或百分数+of+名词”构成的词组作主语时，其谓语动词要以of后面的名词而定。名词是复数，谓语动词用复数：名词是单数，谓语动词用单数。例如：‎ ‎ It is said that 35 per cent of the doctors are women.‎ ‎ Three –fourths of the surface of the earth is sea.‎ ‎（6）half, the rest等表示不定数量的名词作主语时，如果所指为复数意义，动词用复数；如果所指为单数意义，动词用单数。例如：‎ ‎ I have read a large part of the book, the rest is more difficult.‎ ‎ Only ten students attended the class because all the rest were off sick.‎ ‎ （7）由what 引导地主于从句作主语时，通常谓语动词用单数形式。但如果所指内容为复数意义时，谓语动词用复数形式。例如：‎ ‎ What she said is correct.‎ ‎ What she left me are a few old books.‎ ‎ （8）凡是以“定冠词+形容词（或分词）”作主语，往往根据意义一致的原则决定谓语动词的单复数形式。如果这种主语指的是一类人，谓语动词用复数；如果指的是一个人或抽象概念，谓语动词用单数形式。例如：‎ ‎ The sick have been cured and the lost have been found.‎ ‎ The dead is a famous person.‎ ‎3. 邻近一致的原则 ‎（1）由连词or, either……or, neither……nor, not only…but also,等连接的并列主语，如果一个是单数，一个是复数，则谓语动词按就近一致原则，与最靠近它的主语一致。例如：‎ Either you or I am right.‎ Neither the children nor the teacher knows anything about it.‎ ‎（2）在“There be” 句型中,谓语动词和靠近的主语一致。 ‎ ‎　　 There are two apples and one egg in it. ‎ ‎　　（3）as well as 和名词连用时,谓语动词和第一个名词相一致。 ‎ ‎　　 He as well as I is responsible for it. ‎ ‎　　 不但是我，他对这件事也有责任。‎ ‎ （4）以here开头的句子，其谓语动词和靠近的主语一致。‎ ‎ Here is a letter and some books for you.‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (2004年天津市中考试题)‎ ‎ How time flies! Ten years ________ passed.‎ ‎ A. have B. has C. is D. are ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是主谓一致。Ten years通常被看作是一个时间整体，谓语动词用单数形式。‎ ‎2. (2004年南通市中考试题)‎ ‎ Not only his parents but also his brother ________ to the Summer Palace. They haven’t been back.‎ ‎ A. have been B. have gone C. has been D. has gone ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是主谓一致。如果由not only…but also连接两个并列主语，其谓语动词同相邻的主语保持一致，谓语动词应用单数形式。又因为他们还都没有回来，所以用has gone而不用has been。‎ ‎3. (2004年吉林市中考试题)‎ ‎ Neither my father ________ going to see the patient.‎ ‎ A. nor I am B. nor I are ‎ C. or me are D. or me is ‎ 答案：A。该题考查的是主谓一致。Neither…nor是一组连词，可连接连个并列主语，其谓语动词应同靠近的主语I保持一致, 因此应选A。‎ ‎4. (2004年包头市中考试题)‎ ‎ Look! There _______ playing with the tourists on Yinhe Square.‎ ‎ A. are a number of deer B. are a number of deers ‎ C. is a number of deer D. is a number of deers ‎ 答案：A。该题考查的是主谓一致。这个句子的主语是a number of deer, 是个复数概念，因此谓语动词应用复数形式。（deer单复数相同）‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 选择填空 ‎1. They said the eighteenth and last lesson _______ quite easy.‎ ‎ A. is B. was C. are D. were ‎2. ---When are you going to Kumming for your holidays?‎ ‎ ---I haven’t decided. ______ this Sunday ______ next Sunday is OK.‎ ‎ A. Both; and B. Either; or C. Neither; nor D. Not only; but also ‎3. ______ Helen ______ Joan speaks beautiful Chinese after they came to China.‎ ‎ A. Neither; nor B. Not only; but also C. Both; and D. A and B ‎4. _______ of them has his own opinion.‎ ‎ A. Both B. Some C. Every D. Each ‎5. Are there any _______ on the farm?‎ ‎ A. horse B. duck C. chicken D. sheep ‎6. My shirt _____ white and my trousers _____ blue.‎ A. are; are B. are; is C. is; is D. is; are ‎7. ------Two months _______ quite a long time.‎ ‎------Yes. I’m afraid that he will miss a lot of lessons.‎ A. is B. are C. was D. were ‎8. The old man has two children but _____ of them lives with him.‎ A. both B. none C. neither D. all ‎9. Our knowledge of computer _____ growing all the time.‎ A. be B. is C. are D. were ‎10. Everyone except Tom and John _____ there when the meeting began.‎ A. is B. was C. are D. were ‎11. Most of the houses _______ this year.‎ A. has built B. have built C. has been built D. have been built ‎12. I think maths _____ very difficult to learn.‎ A. is B. are C. has D. have ‎13. A large number of students _____ to work in Xingjiang.‎ A. have gone B. has gone C. goes D. is going ‎14. The number of the students in the class ______ small.‎ A. are B. is C. have D. were ‎15. There _____ a lot of good news in today’s newspaper.‎ A. is B. are C. was D. were 二. 用所给动词的适当形式填空 ‎1. _____ (be) everything OK?‎ ‎2. Nobody _______ (know) the answer to the question.‎ ‎3. Ten divided by two _______ (be) five.‎ ‎4. Most of the drinking water ______ (be) from the Black River.‎ ‎5. Not only she but also I _______ (do) morning exercises every day.‎ ‎6. Either you or she _____ (have) made a wrong decision.‎ ‎7. The family _____(be) spending the weekend together.‎ ‎8. Bread and butter ______ (be) her daily breakfast.‎ ‎9. The police _____ (be) trying to catch the thief.‎ ‎10. The number of people invited _____ fifty, but a number of them ____ absent for different reasons.‎ 三. 翻译下列句子 ‎1.我们两个人都没有看这部电影。‎ ‎ ___________________________.‎ ‎2.我的茶杯里没有水了。‎ ‎ ___________________________.‎ ‎3.不是他就是我要到哪儿去。‎ ‎ ___________________________.‎ ‎4.学生们和老师都不知道这件事。‎ ‎ ___________________________.‎ ‎5.我们家正在一起度周末。‎ ‎ ___________________________.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1. B 2.B 3.D 4.D 5.D 6.D 7.A 8.C 9.B 10.B11.D 12.A 13.A 14.B 15.A 二. 1.Is 2.knows 3.is 4.is 5.do 6.has 7.are 8.is 9.are 10.was; were 三. 1.Neither of us has seen the film.‎ ‎2.There is no water in my cup.‎ ‎3.Either he or I is going there.‎ ‎4.Neither the students nor the teacher knows this matter.‎ ‎5.Our family are spending the weekend together.‎ ‎（12）短语动词和句型的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十二. 短语动词和句型 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1. 短语动词的辨析；‎ ‎2. 英语句子的基本句型结构；‎ ‎3. 初中阶段主要句型的用法。‎ ‎【名师点睛】‎ ‎ 短语动词是中考的重要内容之一。在初中阶段，我们已经学习了不少短语 动词，把他们加以归纳总结，进行重点复习是十分必要的。英语中有许多短语动词在意义上是一个整体，其用法有的相当于及物动词，有的相当于不及物动词，有的兼有及物动词和不及物动词的特征。‎ ‎1. 短语动词的分类 ‎(1)动词＋介词 常见的有look for, look after, ask for, laugh at, hear of 等。这类短语动词的宾语只能放在介词后。如：‎ Don’t laugh at others.‎ Tom asked his parents for a bike.‎ ‎(2)动词＋副词 常见的有give up, pick up, think over, find out, hand in,等。这类短语动词的宾语如果是名词，既可放在副词前边，又可放在副词后边；宾语如果是人称代词或反身代词，则要放在副词前边。如：‎ You’ll hand in your homework tomorrow.‎ Please don’t forget to hand it in.‎ ‎(3)动词＋副词＋介词 常见的有 go on with, catch up with等。这类短语动词的宾语只能放在介词后边。如：‎ Go on and I’ll catch up with you in five minutes.‎ After a short rest, he went on with his research work.‎ ‎(4)动词＋名词＋介词 常见的有take care of, make use of, pay attention to, make fun of 等。这类短语动词的宾语只能放在介词后边。如：‎ You should pay attention to your handwriting.‎ We should make full use of our time.‎ ‎(5)动词＋形容词 常见的有leave open, set free, cut open等。这类短语动词的宾语如果是名词，则宾语可放在形容词的前边，也可放在后边；宾语如果是人称代词或反身代词，则必须放在形容词前边。如：‎ The prisoners were set free.‎ He cut it open.‎ ‎(6)动词＋名词 常见的有take place, make friends等。这类短语动词用作不及物动词。如：‎ This story took place three years ago.‎ I make friends with a lot of people.‎ ‎2. 短语动词的辨析 ‎(1)be made in（在……生产或制造），be made of(由……组成或构成)‎ ‎(2)come down(下来;落)，come along(来；随同)，come to oneself(苏醒)，come true(实现)，come out(花开；发芽；出现；出来)，come over（过来；顺便来访），come in(进来)，come on(来吧；跟着来；赶快), come up with(找到；提出)‎ ‎(3)do one’s best(尽最大努力), do well in(在……干得好), do one’s homework(做作业)，do some reading(阅读)‎ ‎(4)fall asleep(入睡)，fall behind(落在…..后面)，fall off(从……掉下)，fall down(到下；跌倒)‎ ‎(5)get down(下来；落下)，get on(上车)，get to(到达)，get up(起床)，get back(回来；取回)，get off(下来)，get on well with(与……相处融洽)，get married(结婚)，get together(相聚)‎ ‎(6)give up(放弃)，give…a hand(给与……帮助)，give a concert(开音乐会)‎ ‎(7)go back(回去)，go on(继续)，go home(回家)，go to bed(睡觉)，go over(过一遍；仔细检查)，go out(外出；到外面)，go wrong(走错路)，go on doing(继续做某事)，go shopping(买东西)，go boating(去划船), go fishing(去钓鱼)，go hiking(去徒步旅行)，go skating(去滑冰)，go straight along(沿着……一直往前走)‎ ‎(8)have a look(看一看), have a seat（坐下）, have supper（吃晚餐）, have a rest（休息）, have sports（进行体育活动）, have a cold（感冒）, have a cough（咳嗽）, have a good time（过得愉快）, have a headache（头痛），have a try(尝 ‎ 试；努力)‎ ‎(9)look for(寻找)，look out(留神; 注意)，look over(仔细检查)，look up(向上看；抬头看)，look after(照顾; 照看)，look at(看； 观看)，look like(看起来像)，look the same(看起来像)，‎ ‎(10)make friends(交朋友)，make phone calls(打电话)，make money(赚钱)，make the bed(整理床铺)，make a noise(吵闹)，make a faces(做鬼脸)，make one’s way to(往……走去)，make room for(给……腾出地方)，make a decision(做出决定)，make a mistake(犯错误)，make up one’s mind(下决心)‎ ‎(11)put on(上演；穿上；戴上)，put up(挂起；举起)，put down(把某物放下来)，put away(把某物收起来), put off(推迟)‎ ‎(12)take off(脱掉衣服)，take photos(照相)，take time(花费时间)，take out(取出)，take a seat(坐下)，take an active part in(积极参加)，take care of(照顾；照料；注意)，take exercise(做运动)，take one’s place(坐某人的位置；代替某人的职务)，take turn(轮流)‎ ‎(13)talk about(谈话；交谈)，talk with(和……交谈)‎ ‎(14)turn on(打开电灯，收音机，煤气，自来水等)，turn off(关上电灯，收音机，煤气，自来水等)，turn down(关小；调低)，turn…over(把…..翻过来)‎ ‎(15)think of(认为；想起)，think about(考虑)‎ ‎3.句子的基本句型结构 根据句子所用动词的不同，句子可归纳为五个基本句型。 ‎ ‎(1)主语+连系动词+表语。例如：‎ My mother is a doctor.‎ Her voice sounds nice.‎ ‎(2)主语+不及物动词。例如：‎ He runs fast.‎ We study hard.‎ ‎(3)主语+及物动词+宾语。例如：‎ Children often sing this song.‎ He studies English.‎ ‎1)常用-ing形式, 而不用不定式作宾语的动词有：enjoy, finish, feel like, consider, practise, keep, suggest, mind等。例如：‎ She enjoys reading novels and swimming.‎ I finished reading the book last night.‎ ‎2)常用不定式，而不用-ing形式作宾语的动词有：wish, hope, agree, plan, decide, refuse等。例如：‎ Where do wish to sit?‎ Tom agreed to lend some money.‎ ‎3)有些及物动词既可用不定式，由可用-ing形式作宾语，但意义不同。这类动词常见的有：remember, forget等。例如：‎ Please remember to post the letter for me.‎ 请记住替我发了这封信。‎ I remember posting the letter.‎ 我记得那封信寄过了。‎ ‎ Stop的用法同上面的词相仿，不过stop后面跟不定式不是作宾语，而是作状语。试比较下列句子：‎ He stopped to smoke. 他停下来吸烟。‎ He stopped smoking. 他停止吸烟了。‎ ‎4)有些及物动词的宾语，既可用不定式，又可用-ing形式，意义基本相同。这类动词常见的有：like, love, hate, begin, start, continue等。例如：‎ I like to swim in summer.‎ I like swimming in summer.‎ ‎(4)主语+及物动词+ 间接宾语+直接宾语。例如：‎ My father bought me a new bike.‎ He gave me an apple.‎ ‎1)及物动词之后跟有双宾语，往往一个指人，一个指物。指人的为间接宾语，‎ 指物的为直接宾语。一般情况下，间接宾语在前，直接宾语在后。如果要 把间接宾语放在直接宾语之后，间接宾语前需加介词。例如：‎ Please pass me a cup of tea.= Please pass a cup of tea to me.‎ Show me your new book, please. =Please show your new book to me.‎ ‎ 2)把间接宾语放在直接宾语之后，间接宾前有时加介词to, 有时加介词for,这主要取决于谓语动词。一般在动词give, tell, sell, lend, show之后加to。在动词buy, make, get等之后加for。例如：‎ Would you lend me your dictionary, please? =Would you lend your dictionary to me, please?‎ Tom’s mother bought him a pair of new shoes. =Tom’s mother bought a pair of new shoes for him.‎ ‎(5)主语+及物动词+宾语+宾语补足语。例如：‎ We keep our classroom clean and tidy.‎ I hear someone singing in the next room.‎ ‎1)及物动词指后跟有复合宾语，一个是宾语，一个是宾语补足语。宾语和宾语补足语之间有逻辑上的主谓关系。例如：‎ We call him Jack.‎ Don’t get your hands dirty.‎ ‎ 2)在及物动词之后，用不定式作宾语补足语和用-ing形式作宾语补足语表示 的意思往往不同。用不定式作宾语补足语指事情的全过程；用-ing形式作 宾语补足语指正在进行的动作的一部分。例如：‎ I heard him sing that song. (我听他唱过那首歌。)‎ When I came back, I heard him singing in the room.‎ ‎(我回来时，听见他正在房间里唱歌。)‎ ‎3)在感官动词see, hear, feel, watch, listen to, look at使役动词let, make, have等的复合宾语种，不定式须省去to。但变为被动句时，省去的to要加上。例如：‎ I saw him go into the room.‎ He was seen to go into the room.‎ ‎4. 初中阶段主要句型的用法。‎ ‎1. It's time to (for) .... 表“时间到了；该干…的时间了”之意。‎ ‎ It's time to go home.‎ ‎ It's time for school.‎ 注意：to的后面接动词短语，而for的后面接名词。‎ ‎2. It's bad (good) for ... 表示“对…有害（有益）的”含义。‎ ‎ Please don't smoke. It's bad for your health.‎ ‎ Please take more exercise. It's good for your health.‎ ‎3. be late for (school) 是“上学（迟到）”之意。for后面还可以接meeting或class。‎ ‎ He was late for school this morning.‎ ‎ Don't be late for class, please.‎ ‎4. had better do / not do sth. 表示“最好做/不做某事”之意。‎ ‎ You had better put on the coat when you go out. It's cold outside.‎ ‎ We had better stop to have a rest.‎ ‎ 注意：用had better时，后面一定要直接跟动词原形，决不能加to do sth. 否定一定用在第二个动词之前，是动词不定式的否定式。‎ ‎5. be (feel) afraid of ... 表示“恐怕”，“害怕…”之意。‎ ‎ He is afraid of snakes.‎ Mary feels afraid of going out alone.‎ ‎6. enjoy doing sth. 是“喜欢（爱好）做某事”之意，doing是动名词作动词enjoy的宾语。enjoy有欣赏之意。‎ ‎ Are you enjoy living in Beijing?‎ ‎ Do you enjoy listening to music?‎ ‎7. stop doing sth. 停止做某事 ‎ stop to do sth. 停下来做某事 ‎ It's time for class. Stop talking, please.‎ ‎ When she saw me, she stopped to talk with me.‎ ‎8. Let (make) sb. do 让（使）某人做某事。‎ ‎ Let's go to school.‎ ‎ Father made his son clean the room again.‎ ‎ 注意：当make sb. do sth. 用于被动语态时，第二个动词前面就一定要加to了。如：‎ ‎ His son was made to clean the room again.‎ ‎ he was made to work twelve hours a day in the past.‎ ‎9. like to do / like doing sth. 是“喜欢做某事”之意。‎ ‎ like to do sth. 是表示比较具体的喜欢做某事；like doing sth. 是表示宠统的喜欢做某事。如：‎ ‎ I like to swim in the swimming pool.‎ ‎ 我喜欢在游泳池中游泳。（喜欢的具体的地方游泳）‎ ‎ I like swimming. 我喜欢游泳（只讲喜欢这项运动）‎ ‎10. ask (tell) sb. to do. (not to do) sth. 请（让）某人（不）做某事 ‎ Jim asked his mother to help him with his lessons.‎ ‎ When did you tell him not to shout loudly?‎ ‎11. give (lend) sb. sth. = give (lend) sth. to sb. 给（借给）某人某物 ‎ Mike gave me a new pair of stockings.‎ ‎ Please lend us your car. ‎ ‎12. be busy doing sth. 表示“忙于做某事”之意。‎ ‎ The students are busy getting ready for the exams.‎ ‎ Is Mrs Black busy washing clothes?‎ ‎13. too ... to ... 表示“太…以致不能…”的含义。‎ ‎ She is too young to go to school.‎ ‎ The old man was too tired to walk farther.‎ ‎14. not……until …… 是“直……才……”之意。‎ ‎ My daughter didn't go to bed until 11 o'clock last night.‎ ‎ We won't have time to rest until the summer holiday comes.‎ ‎15. so ……that 是“如此……以致……”的意思。‎ ‎ Peter is so clever that all the teachers like him very much.‎ ‎ The song is so wonderful that everyone likes to listen to it.‎ ‎16. neither ……nor ……是“既不……也不……”之意。‎ ‎ Mr. Smith is neither a worker nor a soldier. He is a scientist.‎ ‎ Neither you nor I am free. ‎ ‎17. enough to do sth. 是“足以去做某事”之意。‎ ‎ She is old enough to go to school.‎ ‎ Peter was tall enough to reach the apple.‎ ‎19. prefer……to ……是“比起来，还是……好，”“喜欢……而不喜欢”之意。‎ ‎ I prefer English to maths = I like English better than maths ‎ He prefers playing football to playing basketball.‎ ‎20. not ……at all ……是“根本不……”之意。‎ ‎ I don't know Mr. King at all.‎ ‎ David doesn't like singing at all.‎ ‎21．keep sb. doing sth. 是“使某人继续做某事”之意。‎ ‎ Mr. Wang didn't come to school on time. She kept me waiting for two hours.‎ ‎ Don't keep your mother doing everything for you You should do it by yourself.‎ ‎22. keep sth. + adj. 是“保持某物处于某种状况”之意。‎ ‎ Please keep our classroom clean and tidy.‎ ‎ That wool sweater kept her body warm enough.‎ ‎23. see sb. doing sth. 表示“看见某人正在做某事”之意。‎ ‎ When my brother passed the post office, he saw a little boy crying at the door.‎ ‎ Did you see a car coming here ?‎ ‎24. see sb. do sth. 是“看见某人做了某事”之意。‎ ‎ That girl saw an old woman fall down on the road yesterday.‎ ‎ Have you seen the leaves drop into the river ?‎ ‎25. hear sb. doing sth. 是“听到某人正在做某事”之意。‎ ‎ Listen ! Can you hear someone singing on the hill?‎ ‎ We heard him talking with Mr. Li loudly just now.‎ ‎26. hear sb. do sth. 表示“听见某人做了某事”之意。‎ ‎ He was often heard to sing in his room in the past.‎ ‎ Why didn't you hear me come into the sitting rom ?‎ ‎27. be used for doing sth. 是“被用来做某事”的意思。‎ ‎ Knives are used for cutting things.‎ ‎ Teapot is used for keeping tea warm.‎ ‎28. It's three metres long / high/ wide. 它是三米长（高、宽）形容词要放在后面作后置定语。句型是It / 主语+ be +数词+米/公里+形容词。‎ His father is one and seventy metres tall.‎ That river is fifty metres wide.‎ ‎29. What's wrong with ......? / What's the problem with ......?/ What's the trouble with ......?/ What's the matter?表示“出了什么毛病？”“…哪儿不舒服？”“怎么啦？”的含义。‎ What's wrong with your car?‎ What's wrong with you, little girl?‎ What's the matter with your watch?‎ ‎30. Would you like (to do) ......? 是“你想要…吗？”的意思。like后面可以接名词，词组或动词不定式。提出一种建议或邀请。‎ Would you like some fish?‎ ‎ Would you like to go to the cinema with me?‎ ‎31. Will you please do sth? 是“你想要做……吗？”‎ Will you please say it more slowly?‎ ‎ Will you please not open the window? I feel cold.‎ ‎32. It takes sb. some time to do sth. 是“做某事花费某人一段时间”之意。可以用于一般现在时，一般过去式和一般将来时态。‎ It will take us two hours to go over all the words and expressions.‎ ‎ It took Mr Wang half an hour to clean the bedroom.‎ ‎33. I'd like sb. to do sth. 是“我希望某人来做某事”之意。‎ I'd like my friend to help me with my lessons.‎ ‎ He'd like Jim to teach him how to use the computer.‎ ‎34. There's sth. wrong with ......是“某物/人出了问题”，“某物/人有了毛病”之意。‎ There is something wrong the TV set. = Something is wrong with the TV set.‎ There must be something wrong with the car. It doesn't move.‎ ‎35. I don't think that + clause 是“我想…不会…”“我认为…不…”之意。‎ I don't think that any of the questions is difficult.‎ We don't think he will have time tomorrow.‎ ‎36. What about ......? 表示征求意见，询问消息，是“…好不好？”“…怎么样？”之意。‎ What about some tea?‎ What about your mother? Is she all right?‎ ‎37. Why not do ...? 是表示建议，“为什么不……？”之意。‎ Why not have a rest? You have already worked for four hours.‎ ‎ Why not come to play games with us? =Why don't you come to play games with us?‎ ‎38. What do you mean by ......? 是“请问…是什么意思？”之意。‎ What do you mean by "scientist", please?‎ What do you mean by "manager", please?‎ ‎ 可以说What is the meaning of "manager"?或What does the "manager" mean?‎ ‎39. You like singing very much. So do I. 你非常喜欢唱歌。我也非常喜欢。‎ ‎ So do I. = I like singing very much, too.‎ ‎ So在句型"so + be (have，助动词或情态动词)+主语中"有“也”，“同样”的意思，表示前面所说的情况，也适合于另一个人（或物）。‎ He saw the accident, and so did I.‎ She can ride a horse, and so can I.‎ ‎40. It's easy for him to learn English well. 学好英语对他来说很容易。‎ ‎ It's + adj. + for sb. + to do sth. 是“对某人来说做某事怎么样”之意。It是代词作形式主语，真正的主语是动词不定式（或短语），为避免句子头重脚轻而将主语放在了后面。‎ It is dangerous for children to play in the street.‎ It was easy for her to tidy her room just now.‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (2004年北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ When he ________ home, he saw his mother cleaning the room.‎ ‎ A. got up B. got back C. got off D. got on ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是短语动词的用法。根据题意，空白处所填的短语动词的意思应该是“回到”，所以选got back。‎ ‎2. (2004年北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ Father is sleeping. You’d better ________ quiet.‎ ‎ A. to keep B. keep C. keeping D. kept ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是常见句型。had better 后接动词原形，所以应选keep。‎ ‎3. (2004年北京海淀区中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Would you mind _________ my pet dog while I’m away.‎ ‎ ---Sure, no problem.‎ ‎ A. setting up B. looking after C. turning down D. keeping out ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是短语动词的用法。根据题意，空白所填短语动词的意思应该是“照看”，所以选B。‎ ‎4. (2004年常州市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Mum, I’m offered 8,000 yuan a month of the job.‎ ‎ ---Really? It just sounds ________ to be true.‎ ‎ A. so well B. too good C. good enough D. too well ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是“too…to”句型的应用。too good to be true 表示太好了，以至于不会是真的。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项选择 ‎1. Would you please drive faster ? My flight is _________.‎ ‎ A. taking off B. getting off C. turning off D. putting off ‎2. On October 15, 2003 China _______ its first man-made spaceship, which made Yang Liwei a hero to many kids.‎ ‎ A. set out B. Set off C. sent up D. sent out ‎3. ---How is the play going ?‎ ‎ ---We are going to _______ the day after tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. put on it B. put it off C. put it on D. put it off ‎4. Mr Green is busy _______ the newspaper while his wife is busy ______ the housework.‎ ‎ A. reading ; with B. to read ; with C. to read ; doing D. with ; to do ‎5. We have to _______ our things if we travel on a train or a bus.‎ ‎ A. look at B. look up C.look like D. look after ‎6. ---If you ______ a new idea, please call me as soon as possible.‎ ‎ --- Sure, I will.‎ ‎ A. keep up with B. catch up with C. feed up with D. come up with ‎7. ---Zhou Jielun is so cool. I’m his fan.‎ ‎ ---____________.‎ ‎ A. So do I B. So I do C. So am I D. So I am ‎8. ---Your new sweater looks beautiful. Is it _______ pure wool ?‎ ‎ ---Yes, and it’s _______ Inner Mongolia.‎ ‎ A. made by ; made for B. made of ; made by ‎ C. made of ; made in D. Made by ; made from ‎9. Please _______ the box carefully. It is filled with glasses ‎ A. put down B. put on C. put off D. put together ‎10. ---________ ! There’s a car coming !‎ ‎ ---Oh. Thanks.‎ ‎ A. Look over B. Look up C. Look on D. Look out ‎11. ---Look! The bus is coming.‎ ‎ ---But it’s full of people. We can’t ______ .‎ A.get off B. get down C. get on with D. get on ‎12. ---Excuse me. Where’s the Science Museum?‎ ‎ ---Take No.3 bus and ______ at the fourth stop.‎ A. get on B. get off C. get up D. get to ‎13. It’s very cold today. You’d better put _____ your coat when you go out.‎ A. away B. down C. on D. up ‎14. Miss Li told the children to walk one after another. She didn’t want them to ______ in the park A. get wrong B. get away C. get lost D. get ready ‎15. The flowers start to _____ in spring.‎ A. come in B. come out C. come from D. come to ‎16. Lucy, could you please help me _____ the map on the blackboard?‎ A. put into B. put up C. put out D. put on ‎17. “Get a ladder, please. I can’t _____ .” Jim said in a tall tree.‎ A. come back B. come out C. come down D. come over ‎18. I have ____ my parents, and now I’m answering it.‎ A. heard of B. heard from C. heard D. heard about ‎19. I can’t see the words clearly. Can I _____ the light?‎ A. turn on B. put off C. hold on D. take off ‎20. As soon as the man walked into the warm room, he _____ his heavy coat and sat down.‎ A. took away B. took down C. took off D. took up 二. 用非谓语动词填空 ‎1. The bus was very crowded, so she wanted ______ a taxi.‎ ‎2. She enjoys _______ novels before going to bed.‎ ‎3. It took him two hours _______ his homework.‎ ‎4. He has made up his mind _____ hard.‎ ‎5. Would you like _______ the football match this afternoon?‎ ‎6. The child stopped ______ and listened to the music.‎ ‎7. Beethoven taught me ______ the music.‎ ‎8. Thank you for _______ me to the party.‎ ‎9. He lost his money, so he asked his friend ______ a train ticket for him.‎ ‎10. Mark Twain liked to tell funny stories to make people ______ . ‎ 三. 完成下列句子 ‎1. 请你把这些花送给她，好吗？‎ Will you send ____ _____ _____ ?‎ ‎2. 你离开教室的时候，不要忘记关窗户。‎ Don’t forget _____ _____ _____ _____ when you leave the classroom.‎ ‎3. 我到学校的时候，听见她在唱歌。‎ When I got to school, I hear ____ _____.‎ ‎4. 不仅学生们，而且他们的老师也喜欢那个电影。‎ Not only the students but also their teacher _____ _____ ____ .‎ ‎5. 我们都不喜欢跳舞。‎ ‎ None of us is fond of _________.‎ ‎6. 我用了两个小时修车。 It _______ me two hours _______ _______ the bike.‎ ‎7. 直到妈妈回来时，他才完成作业。 He ______ finish his homework _______ his mother came back.‎ ‎8. 他和我都不是老师。    ______ he _______ I am a teacher.‎ ‎9. 他从小就对数学感兴趣。    He became ________ in maths when he was ________.‎ ‎10. 你最好乘火车。 You'd _______ ______ a train.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.A 2‎‎.C 3.C 4.A 5.D 6.D 7.C 8.C 9.A 10.D 11.D1 2.B 13.C14.C 15.B 16.B 17.C 18.B 19.A 20.C 二. 1.to take 2.reading 3.to do 4.to study 5. to watch 6. playing 7.to play 8.inviting 9.to buy 10.laugh 三. 1.her these flowers 2.to close the windows 3.her singing 4.likes the film 5.dancing 6. took, to mend/ repair/ fix 7. didn’t, until 8. Neither, nor 9. interested, young 10. better, take ‎（13）交际用语的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十三、交际用语 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 近年来的中考试题中，对日常交际用语的考查比重越来越大。涉及到在各种情景下的问和答；涉及到英语国家的文化习俗；涉及到口语和书面表达。考查的形式有听力理解，有补全对话，有单项选择，有情景反应，有书面表达。‎ ‎【名师精讲】‎ 初中阶段要掌握的30个日常交际项目是：‎ ‎1.问候 Greetings a.Good morning/afternoon/evening.‎ Hello/Hi.‎ How are you?‎ b.Fine, thank you, And you?‎ Very well, thank you.‎ ‎2.介绍 Introductions a.This is Mr/Mrs/Miss/Comrade….‎ b.How do you do? ‎ Nice/Glad to see/meet you.‎ c.My name is….‎ I’m a student/worker etc.(here).‎ ‎3.告别 Farewells a.I think it’s time for to leave now.‎ b.Goodbye! (Bye-bye! Bye!)‎ See you later/tomorrow. (See you.) ‎ ‎ Good night.‎ ‎4.打电话 Making telephone calls a.Hello! May I speak to …?‎ Is that… (speaking)?‎ b.Hold on, please.‎ He/She isn’t here right now.‎ Can I take a message for you?‎ c.I called to tell/ask you…‎ d.Goodbye.‎ ‎5.感谢和应答 Thanks and responses a.Thank you (very much).‎ Thanks a lot.‎ Many thanks.‎ Thanks for…‎ b.Not at all.‎ That’s all right.‎ You’re welcome.‎ ‎6.祝愿，祝贺和应答 Good wishes, congratulations, responses a.Good luck!‎ Best wishes to you.‎ Have a nice/good time.‎ Congratulations!‎ c.Thank you.‎ d.Happy New Year!‎ Merry Christmas!‎ Happy birthday to you.‎ e.The same to you.‎ ‎7.意愿 Intentions ‎ I’m going to…‎ ‎ I will...‎ ‎ I’d like to…‎ ‎ I want/hope to…‎ ‎8.道歉和应答 Apologies and responses a.I’m sorry. (Sorry.)‎ I’m sorry for/about…‎ Excuse me.‎ b.That’s all right.‎ It doesn’t matter.‎ That’s nothing.‎ ‎9.遗憾和同情 Regrets and sympathy What a pity!‎ I’m sorry to hear…‎ ‎10.邀请和应答 Invitations and responses a.Will you come to…?‎ Would you like to…?‎ b.Yes, I’d love to…‎ Yes, it’s very kind/nice of you.‎ c.I’d love to, but…‎ ‎11.提供（帮助等）和应答 Offers and responses a.Can I help you?‎ What can I do for you?‎ Here, take this/my…‎ Let me…for you.‎ Would you like some…?‎ b.Thanks. That would be nice/fine.‎ Thank you for your help.‎ Yes, please.‎ c.No, thanks/thank you.‎ That’s very kind of you, but…‎ ‎12.请求允许和应答 Asking for permission and responses a.May I…?‎ Can/Could I…?‎ b.Yes/Certainly.‎ Yes, do please.‎ Of course (you may).‎ That’s Ok/all right.‎ c.I’m sorry, but…‎ You’d better not.‎ ‎13.表示同意和不同意 Expressing agreement and disagreement a.Certainly/Sure/Of course.‎ Yes, please.‎ Yes, I think so.‎ b.That’s true/OK.‎ That’s a good idea.‎ I agree (with you).‎ c.No, I don’t think so.‎ I’m afraid not.‎ I really can’t agree with you.‎ ‎14.表示肯定和不肯定 Expressing certainty and uncertainty a.I’m sure.‎ I’m sure (that) …‎ b.I’m not sure.‎ I’m not sure whether/if…‎ c.Maybe/Perhaps ‎15.喜好和厌恶 Likes and dislikes a.I like/love… (very much).‎ I like/love to…‎ b.I don’t like (to) …‎ I hate (to) …‎ ‎16.谈论天气 Talking about the weather a.What’s the weather like today?‎ How’s the weather in…?‎ b.It’s fine/cloudy/windy/rainy, etc.‎ It’s rather warm/cold/hot/etc. today, isn’t it?‎ ‎17.购物 Shopping a.What can I do for you?‎ May/Can I help you?‎ b.I want/I’d like…‎ How much is it?‎ That’s too much/expensive, I’m afraid.‎ That’s fine. I’ll take it.‎ Let me have…kilo/box, etc.‎ c.How many/much do you want?‎ What colour/size/kind do you want?‎ d.Do you have any other kind/size/colour,etc.?‎ ‎18.问路和应答 Asking the way and responses a.Excuse me. Where’s the men’s/ladies’ room?‎ Excuse me, can you tell me the way to…?‎ How can I get to…? I don’t know the way.‎ b.Go down this street.‎ Turn right/left at the first/second crossing.‎ It’s about …metres from here.‎ ‎19.问时间或日期和应答 Asking the time or date and responses a.What day is (it) today?‎ What’s the date today?‎ What time is it?‎ What’s the time, please?‎ b.It’s Monday/Tuesday, etc.‎ It’s January 10th.‎ It’s five o,clock/half past five/a quarter to five/five thirty, etc.‎ It’s time for…‎ ‎20.请求 Requests a.Can/Could you…for me?‎ Will/would you please…?‎ May I have…?‎ b.Please give/pass me…‎ Please wait (here/a moment).‎ Please wait for your turn.‎ Please stand in line/line up.‎ Please hurry.‎ c.Don’t rush/crowd.‎ No noise, please.‎ No smoking, please.‎ ‎21.劝告和建议 Advice and suggestions a.You’d better…‎ You should…‎ You need (to)…‎ b.Shall we…?‎ Let’s…‎ What /How about…?‎ ‎22.禁止和警告 Prohibition and warnings a.You can’t/mustn’t…‎ If you…, you’ll…‎ b.Take care !‎ Be careful !‎ Look out !‎ ‎23.表示感情 Expressing certain emotions a.喜悦 Pleasure, joy I’m glad/pleased/happy to…‎ That’s nice.‎ That’s wonderful/great.‎ b.焦虑 Anxiety What’s wrong?‎ What’s the matter (with you)?‎ I’m/He’s/She’s worried.‎ Oh, what shall I/we do?‎ c.惊奇 Surprise Really?‎ Oh dear?‎ Is that so?‎ ‎24.就餐 Taking meals a.What would you like to have?‎ Would you like something to eat/drink?‎ b.I’d like…‎ Would you like some more…?‎ Help yourself to some…‎ c.Thank you. I’ve had enough/Just a little, please.‎ ‎25.约会 Making appointments a.Are you free this afternoon/evening?‎ How about tomorrow morning/afternoon/evening?‎ Shall we meet at 4: 30 at…?‎ b.Yes, that’s all right.‎ Yes, I’ll be free then.‎ c.No, I won’t be free then. But I’ll be free…‎ a.       All right. See you then.‎ ‎26.传递信息 Passing on a message a.Will you please give this note/message to…?‎ b.asked me to give you this note.‎ c.Thanks for the message.‎ ‎27.看病 Seeing the doctor a.There’s something wrong with…‎ I’ve got a cough.‎ I feel terrible(bad).‎ I don’t feel well.‎ I’ve got a pain here.‎ This place hurts.‎ b.Take this medicine three times a day.‎ Drink plenty of water and have a good rest.‎ It’s nothing serious.‎ You’ll be right/well soon.‎ ‎28.求救 Calling for help a.Help!‎ b.What’s the matter?‎ ‎29.语言困难 Language difficulties ‎ Pardon.‎ ‎ Please say that again/more slowly.‎ ‎ What do you mean by…?‎ ‎ I’m sorry I can’t follow you.‎ ‎ I’m sorry I know only a little English.‎ ‎30.常见的标志和说明 Some common signs and instructions BUSINESS HOURS FRAGILE OFFICE HOURS THIS SIDE UP OPEN MENU CLOSED NO SMOKING PULL NO PARKING PUSH NO PHOTOS ON DANGER!‎ OFF PLAY ENTRANCE STOP EXIT PAUSE INSTRUCTIONS ‎ 同学们在中考复习时，首先应熟记教材第一至三册中出现的常用交际用语和习惯表达法。重点掌握问路、打电话、购物、看病、就餐和谈论天气等六种情景中的表达方法。明确学习交际用语的目的是为了培养与讲英语人士进行口头交际的能力。学习日常交际用语，要了解西方的风土人情，必须记住一些典型的日常交际用语；要明确谈话的场合和对象，因为在许多交际场合，怎么问和怎么答都有一些约定俗成的语言；要注意中西文化传统和背景的不同，使用得体的语言。因此，同学们必须熟悉这些套话，熟练地掌握它们。这样才能结合自己所处的环境，知道在什么时候、什么地方、用什么方式、对什么人使用恰当的语言表达出自己的意思，给予正确的应答，还要能自如应付各种形式的测试，如单项选择、对号入座、补全对话及排列顺序等。‎ ‎ 做这类题目的思路和方法归纳起来有以下九点：‎ ‎1. 要根据不同的情景，使用不同的表达法。‎ ‎2. 要正确判断出对话的情景。‎ ‎3. 问话或答语不能离题。‎ ‎4. 用筛选法选择正确对话。‎ ‎5. 从语意进行判断。‎ ‎6. 根据习惯用法进行选择。‎ ‎7. 答语要符合西方人的文化、风俗和习惯。‎ ‎8. 要使用文明礼貌的语言。‎ ‎9. 要遵照口语交际特点，不要死套语法规则。‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎1. (2004年北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Would you like to go out for a walk with us?‎ ‎ ---_________, but I must finish my homework first.‎ ‎ A. Of course not B. That’s all right ‎ C. I’d love to D. Yes, I do ‎ 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是如何婉拒别人的邀请。对方邀请出去散步，但因为要做家庭作业而婉言拒绝。符合这一情景的答语只有C。‎ ‎2. (2004年江西省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---I haven’t seen Jack for three days. Is he ill?‎ ‎ ---________. His mother told me that he was in hospital.‎ ‎ A. I am afraid so B. I hope not ‎ C. I don’t expect D. I am afraid not ‎ 【解析】答案：A。该题考查的是如何回答别人的询问。对方询问某人是否有病，由于答话人已经知道某人有病（从后一句答语可知），只能给出肯定回答。‎ ‎3. (2004年济宁市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Thank you for your delicious dinner.‎ ‎ ---__________.‎ ‎ A. Don’t say that B. It’s nothing ‎ C. I don’t think so D. I’m glad you enjoyed it ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是如何回答别人的感谢和赞扬。说英语国家的人在回答别人的感谢和赞扬时与中国人的习惯不同, 他们不是自我谦虚，而是表示高兴。‎ ‎4. (2004年济宁市中考试题)‎ ‎ Turn the box over, please. Can’t you see the words “________”?‎ ‎ A. DANGER B. MENU C. THIS SIDE UP D. FRAGILE ‎ 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是常用英语标志和说明。只有看到箱子上有 “THIS SIDE UP”这样的标志，才能发现箱子放倒了，才会让对方把箱子反过来。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ 一. 单项选择 ‎1. ---I hope you don’t mind my pointing out your mistakes.‎ ‎----_________ .‎ A. Not at all B. You’re welcome C. Of course D. It’s a pleasure ‎2. ---I’m sorry. I’ve broken your cup.‎ ‎---_______ .‎ A. It doesn’t matter B. Thank you C. Not at all D. Excuse me ‎3. ---Shall we go to the zoo tomorrow?‎ ‎---_________‎ A. It doesn’t matter. B. That’s nothing.‎ C. Good idea! D. You’re welcome.‎ ‎4. ---Will you go shopping together with us this Sunday, Jenny?‎ ‎ ---Yes, __________.‎ ‎ A. I do B. I’d like to C. I’d love to do D. I’m busy ‎5. ---What a nice meal! Thank you for having us.‎ ‎ ---________.‎ ‎ A. It doesn’t matter B. It was a pleasure ‎ C. Not nice enough D. With pleasure ‎6. --Wish you a happy New Year!‎ ‎ ---________.‎ ‎ A. The same to you B. You do too ‎ C. The same as you D. You have it too ‎7. ---Hello. May I speak to Tom Smith?‎ ‎ ---Yes. _______.‎ ‎ A. My name’s Tom Smith B. I’m Tom Smith ‎ C. This is Tom Smith D. Tom Smith’s me ‎8. ---What are Johnson’s family like?‎ ‎ ---____________.‎ ‎ A. His family is just like mine B. They all like sports and games ‎ C. Oh, it’s really a big one D. They are all warm-hearted and helpful ‎9. ---Do you mind if I open the door?‎ ‎ ---_______.‎ ‎ A. No, of course not B. Yes, please ‎ C. Yes, you can D. No, you can’t open it ‎10.---Help yourself to some fruit.‎ ‎ ---__________‎ ‎ A. Thank you. B. Yes, I like it very much.‎ ‎ C. OK. It’s nothing serious. D. Really?‎ 二. 交际英语 ‎1. ---__________________ ? ‎---Hold on, please.‎ A. Are you Bruce, please B. Who are you C. Are you at home, Bruce D. May I speak to Bruce, please ‎2. ---Could you tell me how to get to Peterson Building, please? ‎---________________.‎ A. Don’t ask me B. Sure. You can take the No.3 bus C. You’re welcome D. Thank you all the same ‎3. ---Oh, what a nice picture! You draw very well. ‎---________________.‎ A. Yes, it’s very bad B. Yours is good C. Of course not D. Thank you ‎4. ---What’s wrong with you? ‎---_________________.‎ A. I’ve got a headache B. She’ll take some medicine C. I’ve got a new bike D. I’m a doctor ‎5. ---Happy New Year! ‎---________________.‎ A. You are happy B. The same to you C. Happy birthday ‎ D. Yes, I’m happy, too ‎6. ---What’s the weather like? ‎---_______________. A. I like the weather B. It’s sunny C. I don’t like the weather D. It’s rain ‎7. ---________________? ‎---It’s Saturday.‎ A. What’s the date B. What time is it C. What day is it today D. How much is it ‎8. ---Would you like to come to my house for supper? ‎---__________________.‎ A. I’d love to. But I’m afraid I can’t B. Yes, I can’t C. No, I would D. Yes, I wouldn’t ‎9. ---What can I do for you, madam? ‎---__________________.‎ A. I can help myself B. No, I don’t need C. Yes, please help me D. I’d like to buy a pair of shoes of my daughter ‎10. ---I’ve passed the exam. ‎---__________________.‎ A. Congratulations!‎ B. Bad luck!‎ C. Thank you for telling me.‎ D. It’s nothing.‎ 三. 补全对话 John: Hello, Jim. May I come in?‎ Jim: Oh, hello, John. Yes, come in, please.‎ John: You don’t look well. What’s the matter?‎ Jim: __1__‎ John: Oh dear! Why don’t you go to bed for a rest?‎ Jim: __2__ ‎ John: shall I call him and tell him you’re ill?‎ Jim: __3__ ‎ John: OK. I’ll do that. I’m going to the shops now. Can I get you some medicice?‎ Jim: __4__ ‎ John: Yes, of course. Is there anything else I can do?‎ Jim: __5__‎ John: see you later then. Take care!‎ A. Oh, yes, please. His number is in the phone book.‎ B. No, I’ll be all right. Thanks for your help.‎ C. My head hurts and I feel really hot.‎ D. Could you buy me a bottle of aspirin,please?‎ E. It doesn’t hurt very much.‎ F. I can’t. I will play ping-pong with our teacher this afternoon.‎ G. Do you think it’s a good idea?‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.A 2‎‎.A 3.C 4.B 5.B 6.A 7.C 8.D 9.A 10.A 二.1.D 2.B 3.D 4.A 5.B 6.B 7.C 8.A 9.D 10.A 三. 1.C 2.F 3.A 4.D 5.B ‎（14）听力理解的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十四、听力理解及其解题方法 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 听力理解题的要求主要是：‎ ‎1、能听懂基本上没有生词，贴近学生生活的语言材料；‎ ‎2、能听懂并正确的辨别所听到的句子；‎ ‎3、能听懂声音材料中涉及到的主要信息或重要细节；‎ ‎4、能听懂对话或短文中谈论的要点、中心意思，并根据题目要求做出合理的判 ‎ 断，如：推理出对话发生的时间、地点、对话人物关系和身份等。 ‎ ‎【名师解难】‎ 一. 训练方法 可能很多同学认为面对听力，总有一种无从下手的感觉。其实尽管中考的听力很难靠猜题和压题来复习，但是中考中的听力测试部分不是随意设计的，它遵循《英语课程标准》的规定和要求，因此同学们只要注意方法，多听多练，就会发现听力部分并没有想象中的那么难。那么我们如何利用好这一年的时间，争取在听力水平上有所提高呢？ 1. 首先要充分利用好英语老师在课堂上的语言。一般的英语老师在英语课堂上 ‎ 都是尽可能的利用英语来组织教学，无论老师说多说少，同学们都可以把这当成练习听力的好机会。在听得不大明白的情况下，要仔细听上下文，从老师前后的语言中来猜测、判断语意，或是根据老师的手势、眼神、动作等来分析，千万不要因为听不大懂而放弃。如果能利用好老师的课堂上的语言，对你的听力会有不少的帮助。 ‎ ‎2. 在平时的学习和生活中，充分利用国内或国外的优秀的英语广播和电视节目等，选择比较适合自己水平的节目，看比较简单的英语原声电影，等等。现在有很多电视频道和广播都有针对中学生开辟的栏目，同学们不妨每天定期收看，并作好听力记录，把能够听懂的东西记录下来，也可以把不明白的句子或单词记录下来（尽可能地记录），等节目结束后去揣摩或问老师。坚持下来，就会在无形中既提高了听的能力，还能有助于增长词汇量和知识，是帮助学习者打下牢固听力基础的较好方法，并建立语言沟通能力的自信心的有效途。‎ ‎3. 在泛听的基础上，必须安排一定的时间进行专项、综合和强化性听力训练。选择难易适度的材料，先易后难，先慢后快地进行。‎ 二. 解题技巧 ‎1. 先看题后听音：在做听力题时，一定要做到听前先把听力试卷全部看一遍，尤其是听对话和听短文这两种类型，以大概掌握主题内容，缩小听力范围；‎ ‎2. 把握全文：听第一遍时，不要急于做答，应仔细把全文听完，尽可能弄明白文章的大意；‎ ‎3. 边听边记：听的过程中，可以适当地做一些记录，如：时间、地点、数字、人物、天气等等，同时把可能正确的答案做上记号。 ‎ ‎4. 抓关键词：无论谈话的主题是什麽，总会涉及到这类主题的专门用语。抓住这个关键词，谈话地点，人物关系就好确定了。‎ ‎5. 不因前误后：有时一个词或一个句子没有听懂，不必着急。将没听清楚的词或句子放过去，不要影响了下一道题。‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ 陕西省的听力的题目分为三个部分，下面我们按照题目地类型分别加以说明：‎ ‎1. 听句子，选答语 这类题目要求考生在听完一个句子的录音后，从书面的三个备选项中，找出所听到的句子的答语。这类题型在考察中一般属于较易题，考察的重点为大纲中日常交际用语表中所列项目。请看2004年陕西省听力部分第1题：‎ ‎1. A. I think so. B. Thanks a lot. C. I hope so.‎ 录音材料：‎ ‎1. Wish you good luck in this exam!‎ 在解答本题前，同学们通过快速浏览书面选择项，通过特定情景用语的分析，就可将问题的内容基本推测出来。对方向你表示良好地祝愿，你的回答当然是表示感谢。答案为B。‎ II. 听对话，选答案 这类题目让考生听一组对话，在听完对话后，接着由第三者根据对话的内容提出问题，要求考生在领会谈话要旨的基础上，从书面三个备选项中挑选能回答所听到问句的正确答案、或是让考生辨别说话人的职业或者两人之间的关系以及推断谈话发生的场合或地点等。请看2004年陕西省听力部分第6题：‎ ‎6. A. Weather. B. Business. C. Season.‎ 录音材料：‎ ‎6. W: I am going to London on business. Can you tell me if it rains a lot there?‎ M: Yes, it often rains there. Question: What are they talking about? ‎ 该题中的女士问的是下雨的事，男士回答的也是下雨的事。他们谈论的话题当然是天气。答案为A。‎ III. 听短文，选答案 听短文要注意听大意，要善于捕捉整体信息，切莫一个词一个词地听，也不要听一句就翻译一句，更不必因一个词或一个短语没听懂就停步不前，一定要带着短文后的要求和指令去听。听的短文通常是结构紧凑的故事，选用大多是围绕who , when , where , what , how 或why所设的问题。因此，在听的时候应紧紧围绕选项内容作些速记，记下关键词语，理清线索，抓好前后联系，最后才准确做出答案。请看2004年陕西省听力部分第16-20题： 16. Where did Jack work?‎ A. On a farm. B. In an office. C. In a factory.‎ ‎17. How often did he get his money?‎ A. Every month. B. Every week. C. Every half month.‎ ‎18. What happened this month?‎ A. Jack got more money.‎ B. Jack got less money.‎ C. Jack got enough money.‎ ‎19. From this passage we know that ________.‎ A. the manager believe Jack B. Jack wasn’t an honest (诚实的) man C. Jack was an honest man ‎20. Could Jack go on working in this factory?‎ A. The story didn’t tell us.‎ B. Yes, he could.‎ C. No, he couldn’t.‎ 录音材料：‎ Jack worked in a factory, and at the end of last month he got his money in a paper bag. He opened the bag and found it was wrong. He got fifty more dollars. He put the money carefully in his pocket and said nothing to others. A month later, he got his money again. He found it was wrong again this time. There was not enough money in his paper bag. Then he went to see the manager. ‎“That’s right,” said the manager after Jack told his story. “I made a mistake last month. For one mistake, I can close my eyes. But for two, I can’t. Thank you, Jack. I’ve known you already. I have to choose another man instead of you. I think you should know what do to in the future.”‎ 本题在听短文，选择正确答案的题型中属于较容易题。同学们在听本题前，通过快速浏览试题所给的5个问题及选项，根据所提供的信息，可以推测出短文所涉及的内容是Jack的工作问题。5个问题分别涉及到Jack在那里工作，多长时间拿一次工资，工资出现了多少的问题，Jack诚实不诚实，从而决定了他是否能留下来继续工作。带着这些问题开始听录音。第一遍听音时只听不记，把注意力集中在有关问题的内容上，把握全文大意。第二遍听音时边听边看边记，重点把短文中有关内容与相关的题目对上号，分析判断后就能很快选出正确的答案，即：1.C 2.A 3.B 4.B 5.C。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ ‎ （1） 听对话，选答案 ‎1. A. It’s Friday.. B. It’s April 23rd C. It’s fine today. ‎ ‎2. A. Yes, I’d love to. B. No, I don’t. C. I enjoy reading books. ‎ ‎3. A. Sure. B. Certainly not. C. Thanks. ‎4. A. Me too. B. You’re welcome. C.. Thank you.‎ ‎5. A. Yes, I will. B. Yes, please. C. Thank you. It’s lovely. ‎ ‎6. A. That’s a good idea. B. I’ll take your advice. C. It’s hard to say.‎ ‎7. A. No, you can’t. B. Sure, I’d love to C. Yes, I want.‎ ‎8. A. Me too. B. Thank you. C. That’s all right. ‎9. A. From 8:00 to 11:00 B. Five hours. C. At 8:00. ‎10. A. No, she hasn’t. B. Yes, he hasn’t. C. Yes, never. 听力材料：‎ ‎1. What’s the date today?‎ ‎2. Do you enjoy listening to music or reading books? ‎ ‎3. Can I ask for leave tomorrow afternoon?‎ ‎4. You speak English very fluently.‎ ‎5. Shall I get a taxi for you?‎ ‎6. Let’s go to the concert, shall we? ‎7. Would you like to have a game with us?‎ ‎8. I’m so happy that you could be here at Christmas time.‎ ‎9. Could you tell me what time the plane leaves? ‎10. She has never been abroad, has she?‎ ‎ （2）‎ 听对话，选答案 ‎1. A. Go to the cinema. B. Watch TV. C. Go to a concert. ‎2. A. In a classroom B. In a hospital. C. In a clothes shop. ‎ ‎3. A. To Beijing. B. To Tianjin. C. To Beijing and Tianjin. ‎4. A. Dumplings. B. Bread and milk.C. Bread only. ‎ ‎5. A. 7:45 B. 8:15. C. 7:30. ‎ ‎6. A. He was ill in bed all day.B. He had toothache yesterday. C. He was hurt in a traffic accident. ‎7. A. By bus. B. By car. C. By taxi. ‎8. A. Eight. B. Nine. C. Five. ‎9. A. Your sister. B. The man’s sister. C. Alice’s sister. ‎10. A. Emily is not in. B. The man has got a wrong number.‎ C. She knows Emily very well. 听力材料：‎ ‎1. M: What do you want to do tonight, Jenny?‎ W: I want to go to the cinema. What about you, Jim?‎ ‎ M: Just watch TV at home.‎ Q: What is Jim going to do tonight?‎ ‎2. M: This shirt is too expensive. Do you have a cheaper one?‎ ‎ W: How about this one? It’s only five dollars.‎ M: But I don’t like the colour.‎ Q: Where are the two speakers?‎ ‎3. M: I want to take a business trip tomorrow.‎ W: How long will you be away, Dad?‎ M: Five or six days.‎ W: And where are you going?‎ M: To Beijing first, and then to Tianjin.‎ Q: Where’s the girl’s father going?‎ ‎4. M: What do you usually eat for breakfast?‎ ‎ W: I used to eat dumplings, but now I’m used to eating bread and milk.‎ Q: What does the lady now eat for breakfast?‎ ‎5. M: It’s a quarter to eight. Let’s hurry.‎ W: Well, your watch is 15 minutes fast. My watch is only half past seven.‎ Q: What time is it by the girl’s watch?‎ ‎6. M: Why didn’t Peter come to school yesterday, do you know, Alice?‎ W: It is said he got the flu and stayed in bed all day.‎ Q: What was the matter with Peter yesterday?‎ ‎7. M: Excuse me, where is the nearest hospital?‎ ‎ W: It’s far from here. You can catch the No. 8 bus. But there is no bus now. You’d better take a taxi.‎ Question: How will the man go there?‎ ‎8. M: Did you speak at the meeting?‎ W: Yes, I was the third one. Then five other people spoke after me.‎ Question: How many people made their speeches? ‎9. M: What’s your sister’s name, Alice?‎ W: Her name is Betty.‎ Question: Who is Betty? ‎10.M: May I speak to Emily?‎ W: Emily? Oh, no. There is nobody named Emily here.‎ Question: What does the woman mean? ‎ （3）‎ 听短文，选答案 I 1. What did the man have to do in the morning? A. He fed the chickens. B. He cleaned the bath-room. C. He carried water for the family. 2. Why did the man go to school on foot? A. No bus ran in the direction. B. The school was near. C. His family was poor. 3. What did the man do every Sunday? A. He was taken to church three times. B. He stayed at home all day. C. He played in the street. 4. What can we learn from what the speaker said? A. He is a retired teacher of history. B. He thinks children were happier in the past. C. He lives on a farm far away from cities.‎ 听力材料：‎ Now, you want to know about life in the past, right? I can tell you. When I was a boy, things were different. I had to get up at six every morning. That was not very bad in summer, but in winter it was cold. And we didn't have any hot water in the house. We had to wash in cold water. We didn't have a ‎ bath-room. My dad had some chickens. I had to feed them every morning and then I had to walk to school with my little sister. It was two miles to school and two miles back in the evening. And we had to go to bed at seven o'clock every night. We couldn't watch TV because there wasn't any. On Sundays we had to go to church three times-morning, afternoon and evening. And we couldn't play outside on Sundays. But it wasn't too bad. We had some good times. We could go out and our parents didn't have to worry about us. There weren't so many cars on the roads then, so the streets were safe to play in. And there were not many robbers and thieves in those days. We had to work hard and we weren't able to buy all those things in the shops today. Life was hard, but it was simple and people were happier.‎ ‎ II ‎1. A. Three. B. Four. C. Five. ‎2. A. Because of the food. B. Because of their homework.‎ C. Because of watching TV too long. ‎3. A. Surf the Internet. B. Paint pictures. C. Play games. ‎4. A. Boring. B. Colourful. C. Amazing. ‎5. A. Watching TV less. B. Watching TV more. C. Stopping watching TV 听力材料：‎ Are you a TV lover? Can you think of your life without TV?‎ Many people think if you turn off your TV, your life will be colourful. They also suggest children should watch less TV. TV can give children big problems. First, it’s bad for your studies, you spend too long on TV, you can’t do well in school. Second, it’s bad for your health, because you watch too long on TV, you can’t do well in school. Second, it’s bad for your health, because you watch too much TV, you’re getting overweight. Your eyesight is getting worse. Third, it’s bad for your family life. While your families are watching TV, they don’t talk too much. Also it has too much fighting. Some children always follow the fighting in real life.‎ If you turn off your TV for a week, maybe you can find something fun to do. Maybe you can read books, learn to swim or paint pictures. What do you think? Would you want to have a try?‎ Questions: 16. How many TV problems are there in the passage?‎ ‎17. Why are more children getting fatter?‎ ‎18. What other things can we do according to the passage?‎ ‎19. What will our lives be like without TV?‎ ‎20. How can you make your life more interesting? ‎【练习答案】‎ ‎(1)1.B 2.C 3.A 4.C 5.B 6.A 7.B 8.A 9.C 10.A ‎(2)1.B 2.C 3.C 4.B 5.C 6.A 7.C 8.A 9.C 10.B ‎(3)I. 1. A 2.C 3.A 4.B ‎ II. 1.B 2.C 3.B 4.B 5.A ‎（15）单项填空的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十五、 单项填空及其解题方法 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 单项选择题一向是各省市中考的必考题型。它的特点是考点多，覆盖面广，题量大。其主要考查点是：‎ ‎1. 考查基本语法;‎ ‎2. 考查同义词、近义词的辨析；‎ ‎3. 考查各种词汇的惯用法和固定搭配；‎ ‎4. 考查掌握和运用日常交际用语的能力。‎ ‎【名师解难】‎ 由于单项选择题所考查的范围较广，所以要想做好此类题一要具备扎实的英语基础知识，二要紧扣语境，抓住关键词。具体应注意以下几点：‎ ‎1. 复习时要弄清初中阶段所出现的几种主要时态和语态的用法、结构、与之 连用的状语及各自的特殊用法。重点要分清现在完成时、一般过去时的用 法。对宾语从句、状语从句、动词不定式、比较等级以及它们的用法规则 都要一一弄清楚。还要注意固定搭配、习惯用语、动词的时态和语态、动 词辨析以及不同词性的词的用法。‎ ‎2. 在解题方面要突出语境，在语境中选语句和词汇，防止汉语思维的干扰。‎ 英语中一些关键词的含义往往是由它所处的语义环境（即上下文）决定的，‎ 答题时如忽视了语境，就很容易答错题。‎ ‎3. 在解题时要注意句型结构和语序。要掌握初中阶段所出现的句型结构，注 意宾语从句、感叹句的语序。‎ ‎4. 掌握习语和日常交际用语。应掌握大纲词汇、习惯用语。由于文化背景和 风俗习惯的不同，对于一些日常交际用语应记牢。‎ 从近几年来全国各地的中考试卷分析可以看出，单项选择题的考点主要分布在：名词、动词、形容词、副词、代词、冠词、连词、介词、情态动词；时态、语态；词义辨析、语序、各种不同的从句及交际用语上。‎ 在做单项选择题时，同学们除应具有较扎实的语言基础知识和善于思考外，掌握一些解题方法是很有必要的。‎ 由于单项选择覆盖面广，其解题思路也多种多样。下面我们举例谈谈一些常用的解题方法。‎ ‎1. 直接法：‎ 即直接利用相关语法知识，通过题干中的已供信息，捕捉到解题线索，从而得出正确答案的解题方法，例如：‎ ‎--- Will you come to the net bars（网吧）with me?‎ ‎--- Sorry. My mother always tells me ___________there. ‎ A. not go B. go C. not to go D. to go 根据句意可知此题考查动词不定式的否定形式，即tell sb. not to do sth.，故此题应选C。‎ ‎2. 关键词法 许多题目中都有这样一些词，它们对于快速而准确地判定答案起着至关重要的作用。我们称这些词为关键词（key words）。找到句中的关键词，也就找到了解题的突破口，例如：‎ He hardly hurt himself in the accident, _______________?‎ A. doesn't he B. didn't he C. did he D. does he 该题中hardly与hurt是起关键词作用的。凡陈述部分含有hardly, never, little, few等否定意义的词时，反意疑问句用肯定形式；而hurt一词的过去式与原形相同，此处hurt未加s，应为过去式。因此本题答案C是正确的。‎ ‎--- What did you see, Mary?‎ ‎--- I saw a lot of trees on_______________of the lake. ‎ A. either side B. all sides C. both sides D. other side 在平时练习中，我们接触的多是下列表达：on both sides of the road / street / river。但本题中lake无两边之分，只能是“在四周”。所以正确答案是B。本题中lake一词成为关键词。‎ ‎3. 类推法 如果对题目的备选答案没有十分把握或把握很小，不妨利用“如果A对，那么B也对”的类推法，从而可将A、B予以否定，例如：‎ ‎--- Who's the man at the door?‎ ‎--- ___________________________. ‎ A. He is a doctor B. He is a friend of mine C. He is a famous singer D. He is twenty 仔细分析备选答案就可发现：A、C选项针对的是“职业”。若A是对的，那么C也会是对的。D回答的是年龄。故惟有B才是正确的。‎ ‎4. 前后照应法 此方法多用于两个以上句子或对话形式命题的题目。解题前，透彻理解，然后联系上下文，捕捉隐含信息，方能准确找出答案，例如：‎ ‎--- He isn't a teacher, is he?‎ ‎--- __________________. He works in a hospital. ‎ A. Yes, he is B. No, he isn't C. Yes, He isn't D. No, he is 本题考查否定句的反意疑问句的回答。由后半句的回答，我们知道“他”的身份不是教师；否定反意疑问句回答中的Yes其实际含义为“不”，No的实际含义为“是”。因此应选择的是B。再如：‎ ‎--- It's dangerous to play here. ‎ ‎--- All right. Let's go and find a _______________place. ‎ A. quiet B. safe C. bright D. dark 联系上下文即可弄清语境：既然在这里玩危险，那么就找个安全的地方。此题应选B。‎ ‎5. 排除法 根据题干提供的信息，先把一眼就看出的干扰项排除，缩小选择范围，然后将剩余的选项填入空白处进行检验，辨别真伪，例如：‎ The girl asked the teacher _______________. ‎ A. what does the museum looks like B. what did the museum look like C. what the museum looks like D. what the museum looked like 本题主要考查宾语从句中的语序及时态的对应关系。主句动词是过去时，从句的谓语动词也应是过去时的某种时态，故A、C被排除。而B中有词序错误，所以D为正确答案。‎ ‎6. 交际法 此方法可用30个交际用语，联系上下文直接解题，例如：‎ ‎--- Would you like to have another cup of tea?‎ ‎--- _______________________________. ‎ A. Yes, I do B. Not al all C. No, thanks D. Help yourself 本题主要考查简答交际用语的应答。对别人的邀请，如果表示不接受时，应委婉说出，不能断然拒绝。因此，选C是最佳答案。‎ 以上六种方法，大家要在具备扎实的基础知识条件下，灵活运用。同时，我们还要提醒大家注意以下几点：‎ ‎（1）不要受母语思维习惯的影响。学习外语常常会受母语习惯的影响。因此解题时也常会受母语思维模式的影响，例如：‎ ‎--- __________________is the capital of America?‎ ‎--- Washington. ‎ A. Where B. What C. In where D. In which 汉语中常可这样发问“美国的首都是哪儿?”所以有人会选A，但英语中where是副词，表示地点。本句是问美国首都是哪个城市，所以正确的选择是B。再如：‎ ‎___________it's difficult to learn English well, __________you should never drop it.‎ A. Though; but B. Though; × ‎ C. Because; so D. Because; ×‎ 汉语中有关联词“虽然……但是”、“因为……所以”，但在英语中though与but, because和so是不可搭配使用的。由题意可知只有B是正确答案。‎ ‎（2）防止定势思维。有些固定搭配或习惯表达法大家掌握较牢靠，但也正是由于受到这些习惯表达的影响，犯一些思维定势的错误，例如：‎ I won't come back _______________August 5 and 7.‎ A. until B. both C. between D. for 受not…until这一固定搭配的影响，很多人会选A。但若仔细审题，则答案应选C。因为“回来”这一动作不能同时发生在两个不同的日期。再如：‎ Canada is larger than _____________country in Asia（亚洲）. ‎ A. any other B. other C. any D. all others ‎“比较级 + any other + 单数名词”是一种典型的比较级结构。所以有人会选A。但Canada是美洲国家，和亚洲国家相比不存在与自身相比较的问题。所以不可用other排除自身。正确的答案选C。‎ ‎（3）防止“鱼目混珠”。有些词由于词性、词义不同，它的用法也不同，应注意辨别，例如：‎ ‎--- Do you know if he ________________to play basketball with us?‎ ‎--- I think he will come if he ________________free tomorrow. ‎ A. comes; is B. comes; will be C. will come; is D. will come; will he 若不注意审题，很容易误选A。但若仔细分析，就会发现前者if作“是否”解，而后者意为“如果”。二者分别引导宾语从句和条件状语从句。英语中，只有在时间、条件状语从句时，从句中用一般现在时代替将来时，在其他从句中无此用法。所以C是正确答案。再如：‎ He made faces _____________the baby _____________crying. ‎ A. to make; stop B. make; stop C. make; to stop D. to make; to stop 题中两个make用法不同。make faces意为“做鬼脸”，后接动词不定式作目的状语；后一个make意为“使得”，是一个使役动词，其后接动词原形作宾补，即make sb. do sth. 所以此题应选A。‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎(2004年陕西省中考试题)‎ ‎21. ---Have you ever heard from your aunt since she went to Hong Kong?‎ ‎---Yes, I’ve just got a letter from __________.‎ A. her B. hers C. she D. herself ‎ 【解析】答案：A。该题考查的是代词用法。这个句子的基本结构时get a letter ‎ from sb.因为from是个介词，后面所跟代词应用人称代词的宾格her。‎ ‎22. I’m reading now. Please tell him _______ the TV a bit.‎ A. turn up B. turn off C. to turn down D. to turn on ‎【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是短语动词辨析。题干所提供的语境是“我正在看书”，因此应告诉他把电视拧小一些。所以应选turn down。‎ ‎23. I’m sure you know the difference _________ “look for” and “find”.‎ A. from B. for C. to D. between ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是介词的用法。题干的意思是“我确信你知道‘look for’和‘find’两者之间地区别。“两者之间的”只能用between来 表示。‎ ‎24. There ________ a football match on TV this evening.‎ A. will have B. is going to be C. has D. is going to have ‎ 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是动词have和句型there be的区别。‎ ‎ A, C, D都是句型there be 和动词have的混合，都是错误的。只有B一个选项正确。‎ ‎25. A talk on science _______ in our school next Monday.‎ A. will give B. will be given C. has given D. has been given ‎ 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是动词时态和语态。时间状语是next Monday,所以动词应用一般将来时，因此应排除C和D。而主语是动作的承受者，所以应用被动语态。只有选项B正确。‎ ‎26. Since China has been a member of WTO, English is ________ useful than before.‎ A. more B. most C. much D. very ‎ 【解析】答案：A。该题考查的是形容词的比较级。在句末有than before字样，表明要用形容词的比较级，而useful的比较级是more useful, 所以应选more。‎ ‎27. It _______ Yang Liwei about 21 hours _______ the earth 14 times in his spaceship.‎ A. spent, circling B. took, travelling C. spent, to travel D. took, to circle ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是动词的用法。本句子的结构是It took sb. some time to do sth. 只有D能用在这一结构中。‎ ‎28. The students are sorry to hear that the famous singer _______ for half an hour.‎ A. has left B. has gone C. has been away D. has gone away ‎ 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是延续性动词和非延续性动词的用法。因为本句中的时间状语是for half an hour，表示的是一段时间，所以应和延续性动词连用。四个选项中只有has been away能表示延续性的动作。‎ ‎29. I am waiting for my friend. _________, I will go swimming alone.‎ A. If he doesn’t come B. If he won’t come C. If he will come D. If he is coming ‎ 【解析】答案：A。该题考查的是在时间状语从句里的时态。在时间状语从句里，通常用一般现在是代替一般将来时。‎ ‎30. ---Could you tell me _______?‎ ‎---Sorry, I don’t know. I was not at the meeting.‎ A. what does he say at the meeting B. what did he say at the meeting C. what he says at the meeting D. what he said at the meeting ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是宾语从语的语序和时态。第一，宾语从句应用陈述句的语序；第二，表示“在会上所说的话”应用一般过去时。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ 单项天空 ‎1. Ann is so careful that she always goes over her exercises to _______________there are no mistakes.‎ A. look for B. make sure C. find out D. think about ‎2. --- Which of the two English dictionaries will you buy?‎ ‎--- I'll buy _________ of them, so I can give one to my friend, Hellen. ‎ A. either B. neither C. all D. both ‎3. He __________ two thousand trees since 1985.‎ A. plants B. planted C. will plant D. has planted ‎4. ___________ you free last night?‎ A. Were B. Was C. Are D. Do ‎5. --- Dad, when will you be free? You agreed to go to the seaside with me four days ago.‎ ‎--- I am sorry, Jean. But I think I will have a _____________holiday soon.‎ A. four-days B. four-day C. four days D. four day ‎6. In the bookshop, a reader asked the shopkeeper ____________Who Moved My Cheese was an interesting book.‎ A. that B. how C. what D. if ‎7. ___________comes from cows.‎ A. Wool B. Chicken C. Pork D. Milk ‎8. Which of the following does paper burn in?‎ A. CO2 B. N‎2 C. O2 D. He ‎9. Today, the forests have almost gone. People must ___________down too many trees.‎ A. stop to cut B. stop from cutting C. be stopped to cut D. be stopped from cutting ‎10. --- You must come back every month.‎ ‎--- Yes, I __________________. ‎ A. will B. must C. should D. can ‎11. The doctor did what he could _________________that child.‎ A. save B. to save C. saved D. saving ‎12. --- Can you guess if they _____________to play basketball with us?‎ ‎--- I think they'll come if they _______________tree. ‎ A. come; are B. will come; will be C. will come; are D. come; will be ‎13. I will tell you how to get to the place; you'd better _____________it __________.‎ A. try; on B. get; off C. take; down D. pick; up ‎14. --- Ann has gone to Shanghai.‎ ‎--- So _____________her parents.‎ A. do B. had C. did D. have ‎15. --- How long can I ______________these books?‎ ‎---Two weeks.‎ A. borrow B. lend C. keep D. buy ‎16. It takes us _________hour or more to go to my hometown by ________train. ‎ A. an; a B. a; an C. an; 不填 D. a; 不填 ‎17. Lucy tried her best to find a good job in the city, but she had no _________.‎ A. trouble B. idea C. luck D. time ‎18. There are three _______________students in the school.‎ A. thousands B. thousands of C. thousand of D. thousand ‎19. I have to speak to my grandpa loudly because there's ___________with his ears.‎ A. wrong something B. something wrong C. anything wrong D. nothing wrong ‎20.--- I've had enough bread. Would you like_____________?‎ ‎--- No thanks. ‎ A. a few more B. one more C. another more D. some more ‎21. I'm old enough to wash _________clothes by myself. You can just wash ______.‎ A. my, your B. mine, yours C. my, yours D. your, my ‎22. The father wished the twins to be doctors, but __________of them liked to study medicine.‎ A. both B. neither C. either D. none ‎23. Now Helen works ______________than before.‎ A. more carefully B. more careful C. much careful D. much carefully ‎24. We are doing much better __________English ________our teacher's help.‎ A. in, at B. at, in C. in, with D. with, with ‎25. If you like the chicken, you may have as_____________as you can.‎ A. much B. many C. more D. little ‎26. --- Mum, Bill is coming to dinner this evening.‎ ‎--- OK. Let's give him _____________to eat.‎ A. something different B. different anything C. anything different D. different something ‎27. The letter is ___________in French. I cannot read it.‎ A. writing B. written C. wrote D. writes ‎28. --- Your spoken English is much better.‎ ‎--- Thank you. My teacher often asks us ___________English as __________as possible.‎ A. to speak, many B. not to speak, much   ‎ C. to speak, much D. not to speak, more ‎29. It's getting dark. Please ______________the light.‎ A. turn off B. turn on C. turn down D. turn up ‎30. Martin is good at fishing, ________________?‎ A. is he B. does he C. isn't he D. doesn't he ‎31. -- Do you know him well?‎ ‎--- Sure. We _____________friends since ten years ago.‎ A. were B. have been C. have become D. have made ‎32. Cars and buses ___________stop when the traffic lights turn red.‎ A. can B. need C. may D. must ‎33. John fell asleep _____________he was listening to the music.‎ A. after B. before C. while D. as soon as ‎34. --- May I speak to John?‎ ‎--- Sorry, he ____________Japan. But he _________in two days.‎ A. has been to, will come back B. has gone to, will be back C. has been in, would come back D. has gone to, won't cone back ‎35. --- Do you know __________________?‎ ‎--- They moved here soon after their son was born.‎ A. when would the Greens move here B. when the Greens moved here C. the Greens would move here D. when the Greens would move here ‎36. Your bedroom is very big, but ___________is rather small.‎ A. she B. Jane C. her D. hers ‎37. _____________book on the desk is___________ useful one.‎ A．The; an B．A; a C．The; a D．The; /‎ ‎38. --- When was our Party founded?‎ ‎--- It was founded _________________.‎ A．on October 1,1949 B．in May, 1922‎ C．on July 1,1921 D．in August, 1927‎ ‎39. This maths problem is____________ and I can do it_____________ .‎ A．easy; easily B．easily; easily C．easy; easy D．easily; easy ‎40. --- They are thirsty. Will you please give them_____________ ?‎ ‎--- Certainly.‎ A．some bottles of waters B．some bottles of water C．some bottle of water D．some bottle of waters ‎41. There is still a little orange here, but_____________ people want to drink it.‎ A．little B．a little C．few D．a few ‎42. Mr. Yu gave some new words to Lucy and asked her to_____________ on the blackboard.‎ A．write it down B．write them down C．write down it D．write down them ‎43. --- Must I finish my homework now?‎ ‎--- No, you__________ .You may have a rest first.‎ A．mustn't B．can't C．may not D．needn't ‎44. --- When did you go to bed last night?‎ ‎--- I didn't go bed ____________my father got home.‎ A．until B．while C．after D．when ‎45. --- Does you sister remember to return the library book today?‎ ‎--- Oh, yes. Thank you. She's_______________ it for two weeks.‎ A．kept B．had C．borrowed D．keeping ‎46. The teacher told Xiao Ming_______________ late for school again.‎ A．not to be B．not be C．don't be D．not to ‎47. Could you tell me__________________ ?‎ A．where does Li Lei work B．where did Li Lei work C．where Li Lei works D．where Li Lei worked ‎48. --- Jone could swim when she was only four years old.‎ ‎--- ______________clever the girl was!‎ A．How B．What a C．What D．How a ‎49. --- Where's Tom now?‎ ‎--- He________________ the post office.‎ A．has been to B．has gone to C．went to D．goes to ‎50. --- Hi, Kate. We're going to help Grandma Li with her housework this Saturday afternoon.‎ ‎--- _________________________.‎ A．So I am B．So do I C．So I do D．So am I ‎【练习答案】‎ ‎1.B 2.D 3.D 4.A 5.B 6.D 7.D 8.C 9.D 10.A 11.B 12.C 13.C 14.D 15.C 16.C 17.C 18.D 19.B 20.D 21.C 22.B 23.A 24.C 25.B 26.A 27.B 28.C 29.B 30.C 31.B 32.D 33. C 34.B35.A 36.D 37.C 38.C 39.A 40.B 41.C 42.B 43.D 44.A 45.A 46.A 47.C 48.A 49.B 50.D ‎ ‎（16）完形填空的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十六、完形填空及其解题方法 ‎【考点扫描】‎ ‎“完形填空”题是一种旨在考查学生语法和词汇知识综合运用能力的典型题型。它结合了单项选择题和短文填空的优点，既考查词语搭配、近义词辨异、动词时态、句型结构、复合句的关联和习惯用法等，又考查了逻辑推理和事理推断能力。‎ ‎“完形填空”题要求填入的词主要有：‎ ‎1. 语法结构所要求的功能词，如连接词、连接代词、连接副词、关系代词、关系副词等。‎ ‎2. 具有语法变化的普通词，如动词的时态、语态、语气，名词的数，代词的格，形容词和副词的级等。‎ ‎3. 固定搭配短语或词组中的特定词。‎ ‎4. 同义词、近义词等易混淆词。‎ ‎5. 根据上、下文意思及结构必须填入的确定词。‎ 可见，完形填空是一种综合性较强的题型。它的突出特点是起点高、容量大。同学们只有具备了扎实的语言基本功、较好的阅读能力及归纳判断能力，才能适应这一题型。‎ 完形填空题的考查目的：‎ ‎1. 考查同学们阅读理解能力。‎ ‎2. 考查同学们语法知识。‎ ‎3. 考查同学们综合运用英语知识的水平和实践能力。‎ ‎【名师解难】 ‎ 一、完形填空题的命题特点 完形填空题是通过阅读考查学生语言知识及语言知识 综合运用能力的一种测试形式。命题人在一段难度适度的文章中留出10个空白，要求考生从所给的A, B, C, D四个选项中选出一个最佳答案，使补足的短文意思通顺、结构完整。‎ 完形填空是介于单项填空和阅读理解之间的一种题型。可以说它是根据一篇文章所提供的情景进行的选择填空，也可以说它是在缺少个别单词情况下的阅读理解。完形填空既有对语法规则、习惯用法和词语搭配的考查，又有对文章内容的通篇理解。完形填空主要考查以下三个方面的内容：‎ ‎1、词汇：‎ 此类题目考查的内容是：近义词的区别，词语的固定搭配和习惯用法。近几年陕西省中考题中的完型填空题考查的词汇类别涉及到名词、代词、动词、介词、连词、形容词、副词和短语动词。‎ ‎2、语法：‎ 此类题目考查的是：各种语法规则在文章中的运用。其中包括名词的单复数，形容词、副词的比较等级，动词的时态和语态，介词、数词、代词和连词的用法，主谓一致，各种从句的用法等。‎ ‎3、结构：‎ 此类题目考查的是：文章中间句子与句子之间，段落与段落之间，上文与下文之间的逻辑关系。‎ 从设空的类型看可分为三个层次：‎ ‎1、句子层次 ‎2、句组层次 ‎3、全篇层次 设空的难度，从句子层次到句组层次，再到全篇层次，依次增加。‎ 分析近几年陕西省的完形填空题，我们可以看出陕西省完形填空题的设空主要以句子层次为主，以句组层次为辅，几乎没有全篇层次题目。因此总体难度较低。‎ 二、完形填空的解题技巧 前面我们已经分析过，完形填空是在全面理解短文基础上的选择填空。因此做“完型填空”题应遵循下列步骤：‎ ‎1、通读全文，了解大意 做这类题目是，首先应该把文章通读一遍，了解一下文章的大概内容。千万不要读一句填一句，因为“完形填空”题里所给的大多数选项填入单句后都可成立，但从全文看又不可取。例如：2002年北京海淀区中考试题中的完形填空题：‎ A hot dog is one of the most popular American foods. It was named after frankfurter, a German food.‎ You may hear “hot dog” ‎1 in other ways. People sometimes say “hot dog” to express 2 . For example, a friend may ask 3 you would like to go to the cinema. You might say “Great! I would love to go.” Or, you could say, “4 ! I would love to go.”‎ People 5 use the expression to describe (描写)someone who is a “show- off”, who tries to show everyone else how 6 he is. You often hear such 7 called a “hot dog”. He may be a baseball player, for example, who 8 the ball with one hand, making a (n) 9 catch seem more difficult. You know he is a hot dog because when he makes such a catch, he bows (鞠躬) to the crowd, hoping to win their 10 .‎ ‎1. A. eaten B. used C. cooked D. picked ‎2. A. strength B. practice C. pleasure D. reply ‎3. A. if B. how C. when D. where ‎4. A. Hot dog B. Don’t worry C. Never mind D. Excuse me ‎5. A. ever B. also C. still D. yet ‎6. A. hopeful B. careful C. kind D. great ‎7. A. a dog B. a land C. a person D. an action ‎8. A. catches B. plays C. passes D. throws ‎9. A. hard B. funny C. exciting D. easy ‎10. A. thanks B. cheers C. medals D. matches 如果不看后面的文章内容，短文的第一个题所给第四个选项都可以填入空白处，不论是从语法的角度，还是从这个句子的意思完整的角度，都是能够站得住脚的。但如果继续看完这一段短文之后，你就会领悟到，“hot dog”在这里不是“被吃”，“被做”，“被拿”，而是“被使用”，只能选used。‎ 有些同学一拿到“完形填空”题，就着手去填，填到最后，才发现所选答案语全文的意思不符，不得不在从头开始。费时又费力，还不易做准确，这种方法是不可取的。‎ ‎2、瞻前顾后，逐步填空 了解文章大意之后，就可逐步填空。 一般来说，文章后面所给的选择答案可分三类：一类是语法正确，而意思不对；另一类是意思正确，而语法错误；第三类是语法正确，意思也正确。在选择答案时，一定要考虑到上下文的意思，还要考虑到句子的结构，习惯用法，固定搭配和词类的功能，尽量使选出的答案及复合语法又符合原文的意思。‎ ‎3、认真复查，适当调整 填空全部做完以后，应把短文从头到尾再读一遍，检查一下填空以后的文章是否连贯，情节是否合理，语法结构是否正确。一般来说，如果意思连贯，情节合理，语法结构正确，就意味着选答没有问题；如果发现个别填空使文章文理不通，语法结构有问题，就说明选答不正确。对这样的填空应该认真推敲，进行调整。‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎（2004年陕西省中考试题）‎ Once upon a time, some children were playing at seaside when they found a turtle(海龟). They began to beat the turtle. Just at that time, a young man came and said to them, “Stop!” The children ran 31 quickly. The turtle was very thankful and said, “Thanks for your kindness. I really would like 32 you to a wonderful palace now.” The young man rode on the back of the turtle and was taken to the secret palace in the sea. When he 33 the palace, he was very surprised and said to the turtle, “What a nice palace!” To thank him, the king of the turtles gave him 34 . He had never seen such a dinner before. He received a warm welcome there and was very 35 everything. ‎ After dinner, the king of the turtles said, “I am going to give you two boxes, 36 you can open only one.” “You mustn’t open both. Don’t forget it!” the turtle warned him. “All right. I will open only one,” the young man promised(许诺). At this time, a large wave sent him out of the sea. ‎ After he 37 , he opened the bigger one of the two boxes.38 the box was full of gold. “My God!” he cried. “I’m 39 now.” Then he thought, “Things in the other box must be expensive, too.” He could not wait any longer. He broke his promise and opened the other box. As soon as he opened it, he became an old man. His hair turned white. His face 40 an old man over eighty years old. It all happened in a moment. He was sorry for what he did, but it was too late. ‎31. A. through B. away C. into D. out ‎32. A. wanting B. asking C. to let D. to invite ‎33. A. left for B. arrived on C. arrived at D. got away ‎34. A. a very big dinner B. a very poor dinner ‎ C. a very bad dinner D. a very small dinner ‎35. A. pleased with B. strict in C. angry with D. sorry for ‎36. A. so B. or C. but D. as ‎37. A. went back to home B. was back home ‎ C. went back to the sea D.was back the sea ‎38. A. To his surprising B. To one’s surprising C. To one’s surprise D. To his surprise ‎39. A. a poor man B. a rich man C. an old man D. a young man ‎40. A. liked B. felt like C. looked like D. looked ‎31. B 根据上下文判断，那些孩子们应该是跑走了。所以应选away。‎ ‎32. D would like 之后应接不定式，年轻人就了海龟的命，海龟应是“邀请年轻人到宫殿去。”‎ ‎33. C 到达某个地方应用arrived at。‎ ‎34. A 按照逻辑，海龟国王要感谢他，必然设盛宴招待他。所以应选a big dinner。‎ ‎35. A 海龟国王盛情招待他，所以他对一切都满意。pleased with everything表示的就是这个意思。‎ ‎36. C 海龟国王给了他两个盒子，但只准他打开一个。这里有一个转折关系，所以应选but。‎ ‎37. B 年轻人在海里见到了海龟国王，得到了两个盒子以后，应该回家，而不是回到海里。而回家应是went back home。‎ ‎38. D 使他感到惊讶的是，用英语表示就是To his surprise。‎ ‎39. B 他得到了金子，当然应该是a rich man。‎ ‎40.C 由于贪心，他的头发变白了，脸“看起来”像八十多岁的老头。‎ ‎ 从2004年的完形填空题来看，难度不大，全部题目都属于句子层次。只要看懂了短文的意思，掌握了一些短语的固定搭配，再多做一些精选的练习，做好完形填空题是不难的。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ ‎ (1)‎ ‎　　A very new, yung officer was at a railway station. He was on his way to visit his mother in    1 town. He wanted to telephone her to tell her the time of his train,   2   she could meet him at the   3   in her car. He looked at all his pockets, but   4   that he did not have the right money for the telephone, so he went on and looked   5   for someone to help him. At last an old soldier came by, and the young officer stopped him and said, “Can you change the money   6   me?”‎ ‎　　“Wait a moment,” the soldier   7  , and he began to put his hand in his  8   “I’ll see whether I can help you.”‎ ‎　　“Don’t you know how to speak to an officer?” the young officer said angrily “Now let’s   9   again, Can you change the money for me?”‎ ‎　　“No, sir,” the old soldier answered   10  .‎ ‎1．A．other ‎ B．the other ‎ C．another ‎ D．one ‎ ‎2．A．so ‎ B．so that ‎ C．because ‎ D．when ‎ ‎3．A．place ‎ B．station ‎ C．street ‎ D．stop ‎ ‎4．A．knew ‎ B．thought ‎ C．found ‎ D．found out ‎ ‎5．A．up ‎ B．down ‎ C．around ‎ D．into ‎ ‎6．A．to ‎ B．with ‎ C．for ‎ D．and ‎ ‎7．A．answered ‎ B．spoke ‎ C．told ‎ D．smiled ‎ ‎8．A．coat ‎ B．handbag ‎ C．wallet ‎ D．pocket ‎ ‎9．A．start ‎ B．to begin ‎ C．doing ‎ D．ask ‎ ‎10．A．easily ‎ B．fast ‎ C．happily ‎ D．quickly ‎ ‎ (2)‎ ‎　　One of Charlie Chaplin’s most famous films was “The Gold Rush” The film was set in California in the middle of the   1   century. At that time, gold was discovered in California and thousands of people   2   there to look for gold, so it became   3   as “the gold rush” People said gold could   4   be picked up by washing sand from the river in a pan of water. This was known as “panning for gold”‎ ‎　　In the film, Chaplin and his friend are in California. So far, they have been   5   in their search for gold and have no money at all. They   6   in a snow storm in a small wooden house. They have   7   They are so hungry that they   8   a pair of shoes, by boiling them in a pan of water. Chaplin sits down   9   the table and eats the shoe. He makes it seem as if this is one of the   10   meals that he has ever enjoyed.‎ ‎1.A．nineteen ‎ B．ninetieth ‎ C．nineteenth ‎ D．ninth ‎ ‎2.A．went ‎ B．left ‎ C．climb ‎ D．found ‎ ‎3.A．famous ‎ B．known ‎ C．wonderful ‎ D．great ‎ ‎4.A．hard ‎ B．easily ‎ C．difficulty ‎ D．slowly ‎ ‎5.A．unhappy ‎ B．unsuccessfully ‎ C．unlucky ‎ D．unluckily ‎ ‎6.A．have got ‎ B．meet ‎ C．are caught ‎ D．live ‎ ‎7.A．a little food ‎ B．some water ‎ C．nothing ‎ D．nothing to eat ‎ ‎8.A．wear ‎ B．cook ‎ C．make ‎ D．mend ‎ ‎9.A．at ‎ B．by ‎ C．near ‎ D．beside ‎ ‎10.A．biggest ‎ B．dearest ‎ C．cheapest ‎ D．most delicious ‎ ‎ (3) Once there was a boy in Toronto. His name was Jimmy. He started drawing when he was three years old, and when he was five he was already very ___1___ at it. He drew many beautiful interesting pictures, and many people ___2___ his pictures. They thought this boy was going to be ___3___ when he was a little older, and then they were going to ___4___ these pictures for a lot of money.‎ Jimmy's pictures were quite different from other ___5___ because he never drew on all of the paper. He drew on ___6___ of it, and the other half was always ___7___.‎ ‎"That's very clever," everybody said. "___8___ other people have ever done that before."‎ One day somebody asked him, "Please tell me, Jimmy. Why do you draw on the bottom (底部) half of your pictures, ___9___ not on the top half?"‎ ‎"Because I'm small," Jimmy said, "and my brushes (毛笔) can't ___10___ very high."‎ ‎1. A.poor        B.sad        C.glad     D.good ‎2. A.bought      B.brought    C.sold     D.took ‎3. A.different   B.clever     C.famous   D.rich ‎4. A.buy         B.show       C.leave    D.sell ‎5. A.men's       B.people's   C.boy's    D.child's ‎6. A.half        B.part       C.side     D.end ‎7. A.full        B.empty      C.wrong    D.ready ‎8. A.No          B.Some       C.Any      D.Many ‎9. A.then        B.and        C.but      D.or ‎10. A.change      B.turn       C.pull     D.reach ‎ ‎ (4)‎ ‎"Jane, please let me borrow a dollar," Jenny asked as they stood in the school lunch. "I have one in my jacket, but I don't want to ___1___ and lose my place."‎ ‎"OK," agreed Jane.‎ Jane waited all day for Jenny to ___2___ back the dollar she borrowed, but Jenny seemed to be ___3___. "She's just forgotten," thought Jane. "I don't want to ___4___ her angry." Still, her money didn't go far. Some classmates, like Jenny, were getting five dollars a week.‎ Weeks went by. At last Jane got up enough courage to tell her about the ___5___.‎ ‎"Oh, Jane, I forgot!" Jenny said, "I'll ___6___ the dollar tomorrow."‎ The next day Jenny seemed to have forgotten again. During the noon hour Jane saw her ___7___ sweets for Mary and Ann. Jenny saw Jane looking at her. ___8___ she said something in a low voice to the other two girls. Jane felt ___9___ and asked her teacher if she could go back to the classroom. In the classroom, Jane saw two new pencils in Jenny's desk. An ___10___ came to her.‎ ‎"Jenny's not kind lately, and anyway, she really owes me. A dollar doesn't mean anything to her, but it means a lot to me."‎ ‎1. A.stay       B.wait     C.leave     D.take ‎2. A.return     B.lend     C.show      D.pay ‎3. A.busy       B.happy    C.free      D.sad ‎4. A.let        B.make     C.keep      D.find ‎5. A.money      B.lunch    C.place     D.classmate ‎6. A.remember   B.bring    C.give      D.pass ‎7. A.borrowing  B.making   C.selling   D.buying ‎8. A.Even       B.Again    C.Then      D.Instead ‎9. A.alone      B.sad      C.hungry    D.lucky ‎10. A.end        B.answer   C.idea      D.excuse ‎ (5)‎ ‎　　Monday is the beginning of the week; it is the day most Americans like worst. The day they ___1___ most is Saturday. Saturday is the ___2___ of the workweek; it is the beginning of the weekend.‎ ‎　　Life is ___3___ on the weekend; most Americans ___4___ care of their houses, cars and gardens. They sleep ___5___ in the morning. They enjoy the feeling that the time ___6___ to move more slowly.‎ ‎　　The workweek is for things you ___7___ to do; the weekend is for things you ___8___ to do. Some people may get in a car for a ___9___ in the country. They like to take part in a sports activity out of doors. And on Saturday night they might go to public eating ___10___ or a film.‎ ‎1. A.like     B.dislike     C.spend    D.leave ‎2. A.middle   B.beginning   C.end      D.day ‎3. A.worse    B.difficult   C.better   D.different ‎4. A.make     B.take        C.look     D.pick ‎5. A.earlier  B.later       C.faster   D.shorter ‎6. A.decides  B.wants       C.spends   D.seems ‎7. A.enjoy    B.hate        C.have     D.find ‎8. A.like     B.start       C.get      D.check ‎9. A.drive    B.walk        C.fishing  D.washing ‎10.A.place    B.house       C.room     D.apartment ‎ (6)‎ ‎　　In the old days, in London, the smog was very thick. Car and bus drivers ___1___ to drive very slowly. They ___2___ saw the road in front of them even during the daytime. People did not like going out in the smog. ___3___ they had to go out, they wore "smogmask" over their faces.‎ ‎　　In December 1952, a very ___4___ dark cloud came down over London. It was the ___5___ smog Londoners had ever had. ___6___ of it was bad factory smoke. Nearly fifty people died in road accidents. But many more people became unhealthy. The smog was very ___7___ for old people and children. One man said, "The streets were almost ___8___ because people stayed at home as much as possible. The air was very thick, and you could almost cut it with a knife."‎ ‎　　After three weeks, the smog began to ___9___. But in the following weeks and months over 4000 people died as a ___10___ of the smog.‎ ‎1. A.hurried     B.stayed   C.had       D.stopped ‎2. A.easily      B.hardly   C.already   D.freely ‎3. A.If          B.So       C.Though    D.Because ‎4. A.clear       B.thick    C.thin      D.small ‎5. A.hottest     B.nicest   C.worst     D.best ‎6. A.Much        B.Many     C.A few     D.A little ‎7. A.favourite   B.strong   C.dangerous D.weak ‎8. A.empty       B.full     C.dirty     D.clean ‎9. A.remember    B.forget   C.arrive    D.lift ‎10. A.part        B.usual    C.end       D.result ‎ (7)‎ Mother's day is a holiday for mothers. It is celebrated in the United States, England, Sweden, India, Mexico and any other ___1___. Little by little, it ___2___ widely celebrated.‎ Mother's day falls on the second Sunday in May. ___3___, many people send ___4___ of love to their mothers. Those whose mothers are still living ___5___ a pink or red rose, while those whose mothers are ___6___ wear a white one.‎ The ___7___ of a day for mothers was first given by Miss Ana Jarvis of Philadelphia. As a result of her hard work, the celebration for the first American Mother's Day ___8___ in Philadelphia on May 10, 1908. Soon the ___9___ became popular all over the ___10___ and around the world.‎ ‎1. A.homes            B.schools         C.countries   D.cities ‎2. A.gives            B.becomes         C.stays       D.begins ‎3. A.For a long time  B.In the morning  C.At a time   D.On that day ‎4. A.presents         B.things          C.hello       D.calls ‎5. A.put              B.take            C.wear        D.dress ‎6. A.ill              B.healthy         C.dead        D.busy ‎7. A.idea             B.plan            C.need        D.meeting ‎8. A.held             B.was holding     C.was held    D.is he.ld ‎9. 64.day                B.holiday         C.month       D.time ‎10. A.country          B.America         C.place       D.England ‎ (8)‎ The ideal (理想的) teacher may be young or old, tall or short, fat or thin. He should ___1___ his subject very well and like learning something about other subjects. The ideal teacher must be full of strong feelings of wonder or interest. He must ___2___ teach anything he himself is not ___3___ in. He ‎ should be like a man who can act and should not be afraid to ___4___ his feelings and tell other people what he likes and what he doesn't like clearly. He must like his students and respect them, and he must also respect himself and be proud of his work. ___5___ he doesn't, he cannot respect his students and ___6___ respect from them. The ideal teacher should have an ___7___ of his students and be able to get on well with them. He needs students' understanding, too. The ideal teacher should be kind and ___8___ and he should give hope to his students to learn knowledge. The ideal teacher should see his students' ___9___ so that he can know how to encourage the growth of ___10___ of his students. The ideal teacher is one who grows, learns, and makes himself better along with his students.‎ So what about the teacher around you?‎ ‎1. A.like   B.know   C.choose       D.remember ‎2..A.never  B.ever   C.even         D.still ‎3. A.weak   B.well   C.interested   D.strict ‎4. A.hold   B.show   C.pass         D.keep ‎5. A.Since  B.As     C.If           D.Because ‎6. A.give   B.lose   C.change       D.win ‎7. 72.A.understanding   B.idea         C.exercise   D.excuse ‎8.A.forgetful       B.helpful      C.quick      D.lucky ‎9. A.lists           B.mistakes     C.cards      D.differences ‎10.A.each            B.every        C.one        D.either ‎ (9)‎ Hawaii is famous for its beautiful beaches. Every year water sports, especially surfing and water skiing attract 1 tourists to the island.‎ Hawaii has ben a magical name to people who like to travel 2 many years. People on 3 sides of the Pacific Ocean（太平洋), in Japan and in America, dream of 4 these beautiful islands in the middle of the ocean. In the tropical（热带的) lands, the sun drops like a ball of golden fire into the sea, and it drops so 5 that you can almost see it move.The sun leaves behind a glow（落日余辉) that lights the sky in the quiet water.‎ People often have a quiet, enjoyable time walking along the water. This scenery ‎ is not very different from the exciting beauty that greeted the first tourists to these islands centuries ago. They came in canoes not much 6 than small boats.‎ They found the beautiful white sand beaches and the waving palm trees（棕榈树)，but there were no grand hotels like 7 we see today. The first people came to Hawaii nearly 8 years ago, but skyscraper（摩天大楼) hotels were only built in the last 25 years. Now aeroplanes make it possible to fly to Hawaii for a weekend from Tokyo 9 San Francisco.‎ ‎10 people come from, they really want to see the earliest beauty of Hawaii. They want to see the lovely beaches and the mountains which are almost hidden by the tall hotels. ‎1. A. many B. much C. any D. no ‎2. A. by B. with C. for D. since ‎3. A. both B. each C. either D. every ‎4. A. to see B. Seeing C. See D. saw ‎5. A. happily B. quietly C. heavily D. quickly ‎6. A. big B. biger C. bigger D. biggest ‎7. A. the one B. the ones C. this D. that ‎8. A. two thousands B. two thousands of C. two thousand D. two thousand of ‎9. A. to B. of C. in D. or ‎10. A. Wherever B. Whatever C. However D. Whenever ‎ (10)‎ Mobile phones are becoming more and more popular not only with grown ups but also with students. Meanwhile, they also ‎1 a problem for middle schools in the past few years. Some children have got mobile phones as Christmas or birthday gifts, and more will 2 want them.‎ Many like SMS because it is easy and 3 . Some parents felt happy because they could get in touch 4 their children. Some teachers said mobile phone use was a distraction（分心的事) to students during school hours and it also gave them much ‎5 in their classrooms. Sometimes students 6 use phone messages to cheat（作弊) during exams. A new study found that some teenagers send messages in class even hurt their fingers because they can’t stop 7 SMS.‎ Many teachers suggested that students should not have phones at school, 8 if there was a good reason, they could 9 their phones at school office. Many people think they understand 10 parents would want their children to have them, but they agree school should let the students know when they can use their mobile phones. ‎1. A. because B. had become C. have become D. will become ‎2. A. still B. yet C. already D. too ‎3. A. quickly B. quick C. hurry D. sharp ‎4. A. against B. on C. with D. to ‎5. A. business B. information C. things D. trouble ‎6. A. dare B. have to C. should D. might ‎7. A. using B. to use C. used D. used to ‎8. A. and B. but C. though D. however ‎9. A. miss B. leave C. lie D. fetch ‎10. A. whether B. because C. why D. since ‎ (11)‎ I first saw the baby panda when she was only 10 days old. She looked like a white mouse. We 1 her Xi Wang. It means “hope”.‎ When Xi Wang was born, she weighed(重) 2 100 grams(克). Xi Wang drank her mother’s milk for as much as 14 hours a day. When she was six months old, she started to eat bamboo shoots(嫩芽) and 3 . Eight months later, she was not a small baby any more. She grew into a 4 young panda and weighed 35 kilos. When Xi Wang was 20 months old, she had to look after herself 5 her mother had another baby.‎ ‎6 , it is very difficult for pandas to live in the wild(野外). Here are some of the 7 that pandas like Xi Wang may have in the future.‎ If hunters(猎人) catch a panda, they will kill it for its fur(毛皮). If farmers 8 trees and forests, pandas will have no place to live in.‎ When mothers leave baby pandas alone, people will often take them away. People think that the baby pandas need 9 .‎ If pandas are in danger, we should try our best to protect them. If we do 10 , soon there will be no more pandas in the world! ‎1. A. made B. called C. told D. kept ‎2. A. quite B. mostly C. just D. hardly ‎3. A. leaves B. vegetables C. trees D. chips ‎4. A. strange B. weak C. famous D. healthy ‎5. A. though B. until C. because D. whether ‎6. A. Luckily B. Suddenly C. Sadly D. Especially ‎7. A. examples B. questions C. matters D. problems ‎8. A. cut down B. plant C. protect D. water ‎9. A. money B. help C. clothes D. family ‎10. A. nothing B. everything C. anything D. something ‎ (12)‎ In the USA, children start school when they are five years old. In some states(州) they must stay in school 1 they are sixteen. But most students are seventeen or eighteen years old when they 2 secondary(中等的) schools. There are two kinds of schools in the USA: public schools and private(私立的) schools. 3 children go to public schools. Their parents dont have to 4 their education because the school get 5 from the government（政府）. If a child goes to a private school, his parents have to get enough money for his schooling. Some parents 6 like private schools though they are much more expensive. Today about half of the high school students ‎7 in universities after they finish secondary schools. A student at a state university doesnt have to pay very much 8 his parents live in that state. Many students 9 while they are studying at universities. In this way they get into 10 working habits(习惯) and live by their own hands. ‎1. A. and B.so C.till D.since ‎2. A. leave B.enter C.reach D. pass ‎3. A. Several B.Most C.A few D.Few ‎4. A. worry about B.pay for C.ask for D.think of ‎5. A. books B. teachers C.food D.money ‎6. A. still B.never C.surely D.already ‎7. A. play B.change C.study D.meet ‎8. A. before B.because C.if D.though ‎9. A. smoke B.drink C.fight D.work ‎10. A. good B.bad C.happy D.wrong ‎【练习答案】‎ ‎(1) 1.C 2.B 3.B 4.C 5.C 6.C 7.A 8.D 9.A 10.D ‎ ‎(2) 1.C 2.A 3.B 4.B 5.C 6.C 7.D 8.B 9.A 10.D ‎(3)1.D 2.A 3.C 4.D 5.B 6.A 7.B 8.A 9.C 10.D  ‎ ‎(4)1.C 2.D 3.A 4.B 5.A 6.B 7.D 8.C 9.B 10.C ‎(5)1.A 2.C 3.D 4.B 5.B 6.D 7.C 8.A 9.A 10.A  (6)1.C 2.B 3.A 4.B 5.C 6.A 7.C 8.A 9.D 10.D ‎(7)1.C 2.B 3.D 4.A 5.C 6.C 7.A 8.C 9.B 10.A ‎(8)1.B 2.A 3.C 4.B 5.C 6.D 7.A 8.B 9.D 10.A ‎(9)1.A 2.C 3.A 4.B 5.D 6.C 7.B 8.C 9.D 10.A ‎(10)1.C 2.A 3.B 4.C 5.D 6.D 7.A 8.B 9.B 10.C ‎(11)1.B 2.C 3.A 4.D 5.C 6.C 7.D 8.A 9.B 10.A ‎(12)1.C 2.A 3.B 4.B 5.D 6.A 7.C 8.C 9.D 10.A ‎（17）阅读理解的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十七、阅读理解及其解题方法 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 阅读理解能力的培养是中学英语学习的一项重要任务，也是中考的一项重要内容。中考阅读理解题主要考查学生的语篇阅读能力、分析和判断能力。要求学生能较快地通过阅读理解短文大意，获取其中的主要信息，能做出正确判断，然后根据试题的要求从A, B, C, D四个选项中选出最佳答案或做出正误判断。文章的难易程度和初三课文基本相同，要求阅读速度为每分钟40-50个词。‎ 中考阅读理解的阅读材料的选取一般遵循三个原则：‎ ‎1. 阅读文章不少于三篇，阅读量在1，000单词左右；‎ ‎2. 题材广泛，包括科普，社会，文化，政治，经济等；‎ ‎3. 体裁多样，包阔记叙文，说明文，应用文等。‎ 中考阅读理解考查的主要内容是：‎ ‎1. 考查掌握所读材料的主旨和大意的能力。‎ 此类考查主旨和大意的题大多数针对段落（或短文）的主题，主题思想，标题或目的，其主要提问方式是：‎ ‎(1) Which is the best title of the passage?‎ ‎(2) Which of the following is this passage about?‎ ‎(3) In this passage the writer tries to tell us that______.‎ ‎(4) The passage tells us that______.‎ ‎(5) This passage mainly talks about_______.‎ ‎2. 考查把握文章的事实和细节的能力。‎ 此类考查事实和细节的题目大多数是针对文章的细节设计的，其主要提问方式是：‎ ‎(1) Which of the following is right?‎ ‎(2) Which of the following is not mentioned?‎ ‎(3) Which of the following is Not True in the passage?‎ ‎(4) Choose the right order of this passage.‎ ‎(5) From this passage we know ________.‎ ‎3. 考查根据上下文猜测生词的含义的能力。‎ 此类猜测词义的题目要求考生根据上下文确定某一特定的词或短语的准确含义。其主要提问方式是：‎ ‎(1) The word “ ” in the passage probably means ________.‎ ‎(2) The underlined word “It” in the passage refers to _______.‎ ‎(3) In this story the underlined word “ ” means ________.‎ ‎(4) Here “it” means________.‎ ‎4. 考查对阅读材料全篇的逻辑关系的理解，对文章各段，各句之间的逻辑关系的理解能力。‎ 此类题目主要考查的是句语句之间，短语短之间的逻辑关系，其主要提问方式是：‎ ‎(1) Many visitors come to the writer’s city to ________.‎ ‎(2) Some shops can be built Donfeng Square so that they may _____.‎ ‎(3) Air pollution is the most serious kind of pollution because _____.‎ ‎(4) Why did the writer get off the train two stops before Vienna station?‎ ‎5. 考查依据短文内容和考生应有的常识进行推理和判断的能力。‎ 此类题目文章中没有明确的答案，需要考生再理解全文的基础上进行推理和判断。其主要提问方式是：‎ ‎(1) We can guess the writer of the letter may be a ______.‎ ‎(2) We can infer from the text that _______.‎ ‎(3) From the letters we’ve learned that it’s very _____ to know something about American social customs.‎ ‎(4) From the story we can guess ______.‎ ‎(5) What would be happy if …?‎ ‎6. 考查推断作者意图和态度的能力。‎ ‎(1) How did the writer feel at Vienna station?‎ ‎(2) The writer writes this text to ______.‎ ‎(3) The writer believes that ______.‎ ‎(4) The writer suggests that ______.‎ ‎【名师解难】‎ ‎ 明确了阅读理解题的考查要点以后，我们现在来研究破解阅读理解题的方法和技巧。‎ ‎1．如何获取段落的主旨和大意？‎ ‎ 最有效的办法是找出主题句。一篇文章（或一段文章）通常都是围绕一个中心意思展开的。而这个中心意思往往由一个句子来概括。这个能概括文章或段落中心意思的句子叫做主题句。因此，理解一个段落或一篇文章的中心意思首先要学会寻找主题句。主题句一般具有三个特点：‎ ‎（1）表述的意思比较概括，相对其主句来看，这种概括性更为明显。‎ ‎（2）句子结构较简单，多数都不采用长、难句的形式。‎ ‎（3）段落中其它的句子必定是用来解释、支撑或发展主题句所表述的主题思想。‎ 在一篇短文或一个段落中，大部分主题句的情况有三种：‎ ‎（1）主题句在段首或篇首。‎ ‎ 主题句在段首或篇首的情况相当普遍。一般新闻报道、说明文, 议论文大都采用先总述，后分述的叙事方法。例如：2003年陕西省英语中考试题阅读材料B的第一段：‎ All living things on the earth need other living things to live. Nothing lives alone. Most animals must live in a group, and even a plant grows close together with others of the same kind. Sometimes one living thing kills another, one eats and the other is eaten. Each kind of life eats another kind of life in order to live, and together they form a food chain(食物链)。Some food chains become broken up if one of the links disappears. ‎ 第一句即是主题句。这个句子概括了本段的中心意思，“地球上所有的生物要生存都离不开其它的生物”。后面讲述了大量的事实，“大部分动物必须成群的生活，甚至一种植物也要和其它同类的植物靠在一起生长。有时一种生物杀死另一种生物，一种生物吃另一种生物，而另一种生物被吃”。在列举了大量的事实之后，作者指出：如果这些食物链中的一个链环消失，所有的食物都会断掉。所有这些事实都是围绕第一个句子展开的。‎ 在这篇短文之后有一道考查主题的阅读理解题：‎ ‎59. Which of the following do you think is the best title for this passage?‎ ‎ A. Animals B. Plants C. Food Chains D. Living Things ‎ 根据主题句的意思，我们可以很容易判断：这篇短文最好的标题是Food Chains。‎ ‎（2）主题句在段末或篇末。‎ ‎ 用归纳法写文章时，往往表述细节的句子在前，概述性的句子在后，并以此结尾。这种位于段末或篇末的主题句往往是对前面细节的总结，归纳或结论。例如2002年陕西省中考试题阅读材料A的最后一段：‎ If you buy some well-made clothes, you can save money because they can last longer. They look good even after they have been washed many times. Sometimes some clothes cost more money, but it does not mean that they are always better made, or they always fit better. In other words, some less expensive clothes look and fit better than more expensive clothes.‎ 这段文章前面列举了两件事实：如果你买一些制作优良的衣服，你会省钱，因为这些衣服能穿得时间长一些。即使他们洗了很多次，仍然看起来很好。有时有些衣服花得前更多，但并不意味着这些衣服做得更好。最后一句话是对这两个事实的概括：有些价钱便宜的衣服比价钱贵的衣服更好看，更合身。段末这个句子就是主题句。‎ ‎（3）无主题句 有时，一篇文章里并没有明显的主题句。这时我们应该怎样来确定文章的主题或中心意思呢？其实这也不难。我们可以首先找出每一段的中心意思，各段的中心意思往往都是围绕一个中心来展开的，或者说是来说明一个问题的。这个中心或这个问题就是这篇文章的主题或中心意思。‎ 请看2004年江西省中考试题阅读理解A:‎ Killer bees started in Brazil 1957. A scientist in Sao Paulo wanted bees to make more honey（蜂蜜). So he put forty-six African bees with some Brazilian bees. The bees bred(繁殖) and made a new kind of bees. But the new bees were a mistake. They didn’t want to make more honey. They wanted to attack. Then, by accident, twenty-six African bees escaped and bred with the Brazilian bees outside.‎ Scientists could not control（控制) the problem. The bees increased fast. They went from Brazil to Venezuela. Then they went to Central America. Now they are in North America. They travel about ‎ 390 miles a year. Each group of bees grows four times a year. This means one million new groups every five years. Why are people afraid of killer bees? People are afraid for two reasons. First, the bees sting（叮) many more times than usual bees. Killer bees can sting sixty times a minute nonstop for two hours. Second, killer bees attack in groups. Four hundred bee stings can kill a person.‎ Already several hundred people are dead. Now killer bees are in Texas. In a few years they will reach all over the United States. People can do nothing but wait. 这篇短文表面看起来没有主题句，那末怎样来确定它的中心意思呢？按照上面的说明，我们先找出每一段的大意：第一段讲的是“killer bees”的产生。第二段讲的是“killer bees” 的急剧增加。第三段讲的是人们害怕“killer bees”的原因。第四段讲的是“killer bees”已经杀死的人数和将来的状况。从这几段的大意可以看出这篇文章自始至终都是围绕“killer bees”这一中心展开的。换句话说，“killer bees”就是这篇文章的主题。‎ 在这篇短文的后面就出了一道这样的阅读理解题：‎ ‎59. The best title of the passage is ____________.‎ ‎ A. How to make more honey B. Killer bees ‎ C. A foolish scientist D. How to feed killer bees ‎ 毫无疑问，答案应该是：B。‎ ‎2．如何根据上下文猜测词义？‎ 猜测词义也是一种英语阅读能力。英语阅读理解试题中有不少这样的题目。‎ 任何一个实词，只有在一定的上下文中才能表示一个确定的词义。所谓上下文(context),正如英语辞典所解释的，其作用就是帮助确定上下文中的词、短语或句子的意义。据此，我们可以尽可能地利用上下文来猜测词义，即从已知推求未知，也就是用我们所熟悉的词或短语来猜测我们不熟悉的词的词义。猜测词义时，我们可以从三个方面来考虑：1）根据上下文已知部分进行逻辑上的推理。2）运用语法知识进行语法分析。3）依靠常识和经验做出判断。根据上下文猜测词义的方法有下列几种：‎ ‎(1)根据定义或解释猜测词义。例如：甘肃省2002年中考英语试题阅读材料B:‎ A bag is useful and the word “bag” is useful. It gives us some interesting phrases(短语). One is “ to let the cat out of the bag.” It is the same as “to tell a secret”….‎ Now when someone lets out (泄漏)a secret, he “lets the cat out of the bag.”‎ 短文后面有一个理解题目：‎ John “lets the cat out of the bag” means he ________.‎ A. makes everyone know a secret ‎ B. the woman bout a cat C. buys a cat in the bag D. sells the cat in the bag 在这篇文章里，“let the cat out of the bag”虽然是一个新出现的短语，但紧接着后面就给出解释It is the same as “to tell a secret.根据这一解释，我们就可判断出正确答案应为A。 ‎ ‎ (2)根据情景和逻辑进行判断。例如：2004年北京市海淀区中考试题阅读材料A。其中第三段是这样的：‎ As they go around town, the police help people. Sometimes they find lost children. They take the children home. If the police see a fight, they put an end to it right away. Sometimes people will ask the police how to get to a place in town. The police can always tell the people which way to go. They know all the streets and roads well.‎ ‎ 文章后面有这样一道题：‎ ‎53. In the text, “put an end to” means “___________”.‎ ‎ A. stop B. cut C. kill D. fly ‎ 根据文章所提供的情景，如果警察看到有人在打架，他们肯定会去制止。因为制止打架斗殴是警察的职责。根据这一推理，答案应该是A。‎ ‎(3)根据并列、同位关系猜测词义。例如：福州市2004年中考英语试题的阅读材料B。‎ There is a place on our earth where hot water and steam come up under the ground. It is on a large island in the Pacific Ocean. The island is North Island in New Zealand. ‎ ‎101. What does the word “steam” mean in Chinese? A. 自来水B. 大气C. 冰川D. 蒸汽 ‎ 从语法上看，steam和hot water是并列关系，我们就以断定这两种东西是相关的，是同一类第物质。在所给第四个选项中只有“蒸汽”有这种可能。‎ ‎ (4)根据背景和常识判断。请看2004年北京市海淀区中考试题的阅读材料C:‎ Watching some children trying to catch butterflies one August afternoon, I was reminded of an incident in my own childhood. When I was a boy of twelve in South Carolina, something happened to me that made me never put any wild creature (living thing) in a cage(笼子). We lived on the edge of a forest, and every evening at dusk the mockingbirds would come and rest in the trees and sing. There isnt a musical instrument made by man that can produce a more beautiful sound than the song of the mockingbird.‎ I decided that I would catch a young bird and keep it in a cage and in that way, I would have my own private musician.‎ I finally succeeded in catching one and put it in a cage. At first, being scared, the bird fluttered(扑腾) about the cage, but finally it settled down in its new home. I felt very pleased with myself and looked forward to some beautiful singing from my little musician.‎ On the second day of the bird’s captivity, my new pet’s mother flew to the cage with food in her mouth. The baby bird ate everything she brought to it. I was pleased to see this. Certainly the mother knew better than I how to feed her baby.‎ The following morning when I went to see how my captive (caged) bird was doing, I discovered it on the floor of the cage, dead. I was terribly surprised! What had happened! I had taken extremely care of my little bird, or so I thought.‎ Arthur Wayne, the famous ornithologist, who happened to be visiting my father at the time, hearing me crying over the death of my bird, explained what had happened. “A mother mockingbird, finding her young in a cage, will sometimes bring it poison berries(毒莓). She thinks it better for her young to die than to live in captivity.” Never since then have I caught any living creature and put it in a cage. All living creatures have a right to live free.‎ ‎60. An ornithologist is probably a person who ____________ .  A. studies birds B. loves creatures C. majors in habits D. takes care of trees Ornithologist 这个词从来没有见到过，但是通过他的语言我们可以判断出这是一个对鸟很有研究的人。我很爱鸟，把鸟装在笼子里，并细心照料，而且鸟的母亲也飞过来喂这只鸟，但这只鸟却死了，我很不理解。到我家来的这个人给我详细解释了鸟死的原因，说明这个人非常懂鸟。据此，我们可以断定答案影视A。‎ ‎ 除了前面提到的方法以外，还有下面一些方法：‎ ‎(5)根据同义、反义关系猜测词义。‎ ‎(6)根据因果关系猜测词义。‎ ‎3．如何确定细节和事实？‎ ‎ 在阅读理解题目中，有相当一部分是考查细节和事实的题目。这类题目相对容易一些。这些题目有两个共同特点：（1）凡属针对特定细节的考题，其正确答案大都可以在阅读材料中找到对应的文字部分作为验证。这一部分可能是一个词或短语，也可能是一个句子或相关的若干句子，但句式、用词和表达方式不同。（2）干扰项往往是主体思想与细节混杂，正确答案细节和非正确答案的细节混杂，甚至真假混杂。因此，要做好阅读理解中的确定细节和事实的题目，一要在文章中找出相应的信息点，二要排除干扰项。请看2003年陕西省中考英语试题阅读理解题第48小题：‎ What do plants make food from? They make food from _______.‎ A. sunlight, water and things in the soil and air B. water, sunlight and things in the soil C. water and things in the soil and air D. water, sunlight and things in the soil ‎ 这一小题考查的就是文章的细节和事实。这一细节和事实的表述在文章中可以直接找到：Plants are “factories”. They make food from sunlight, water and things in the soil and air. ‎ ‎4．如何进行推断？‎ ‎ 所谓推断，就是根据阅读材料中所提供的信息，推断出未知的信息。即把有关的文字作为已知部分，从中推断出未知部分。据以推断的有关文字可能是词或句子，也可能是若干句子，甚至是全文。‎ ‎ 中考英语试题中的推断题很多，包括的面也很大。其类型主要有以下几种：‎ ‎（1）事实推断：这种推断常常针对某一个或几个具体细节，是比较简单的推断。进行这种推断，要首先在文章中找出据以推断的有关文字，然后加以分析，尤其要悟出字里行间的意思。‎ 请看2002年南京市中考英语试题阅读理解第14小题：‎ According to the passage, which of the following can you most possibly watch on TV?‎ A. You often play football with your friends after school.‎ B. Your teacher has got a cold.‎ C. A tiger in the city zoo has run out and hasn’t been caught.‎ D. The bike in front of your house is lost.‎ ‎ 在阅读材料中，有这样一段文字：‎ Secondly, a news story has to be interesting and unusual. People don’t want to read stories about everyday life. As a result, many stories are about some kind of danger and seem to be “bad” news. ‎ ‎ 根据这段文字，我们可以推断：电视报道的新闻故事硬是有趣的和不平常的。因此，正确答案应为C。‎ ‎ 推断题还包括以下几个方面：‎ ‎（2）指代推断：确定指代词的含义和指代对象是阅读理解题常见的题目。要确定指代词所指代的对象，关键在于对所在上下文的正确理解。指代名词的指代词，其单复数形式英语被指代的词一致，因此数的形式可作为识别指代对象第一个辅助标志。‎ ‎（3）逻辑推断 这类题目往往是要求根据文章所提供的背景，人物的表情，动作和语言来推断出人物的态度或感觉。‎ ‎（4）对作者的意图和态度的推断 ‎ 这一类考题大都要求考生就作者对论述对象持什么样的态度做出推断， 如作者对所陈述的观点是赞同、反对，还是犹豫不定，对记述或描写的人、物或事件是赞颂、同情、冷漠，还是厌恶。作者的这种思想倾向和感情色彩不一定直接表述出来，而往往隐含在字里行间。因此，进行这种推断时，我们既要依靠短文的主题思想作为推力的前提，又要注意作者的措辞，尤其是形容词一类的修饰语。‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ 请看2004年陕西中考英语试题阅读理解A部分:‎ A) 根据下面一篇短文的内容判断下列句子的正误，正确的用”A”表示，错误的用“B”表示。（共5小题，计5分）‎ ‎(A)‎ Now TV programs play an important part in our daily life. We can get a lot of knowledge and a lot of fun from it. Today is Saturday. The following are some TV programs on different channels today. Now read these TV programs and try to find some information for you and your family members.‎ ‎ SXTV Channel 7‎ ‎ 13: 12 Football Match XATV Channel 4‎ ‎ 15: 30 TV Play ‎ SXTV Channel 6‎ ‎ 18: 30 Cartoon Film CCTV Channel 1‎ ‎ 12: 38 Law Today ‎ CCTV Channel 1‎ ‎ 19: 00 News Report CCTV Channel 3‎ ‎ 21: 00 The Latest Music ‎41. My grandfather is interested in laws. He can watch CCTV Channel 1 at noon.‎ ‎42. My father is a football fan. He prefers football matches. He can watch CCTV Channel 1.‎ ‎43. My mother likes watching TV plays. She wants to watch XATV Channel ‎4 in the afternoon.‎ ‎44. My sister is only six years old. I want to find a program for her. I think she can watch CCTV Channel 6.‎ ‎45. I’m a student. I like music, but I am very busy tonight. So I can watch CCTV Channel 3 this evening.‎ ‎41. A。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。从表中我们可以看到，中午12点38分中央电视台1频道有“今日说法”节目，父亲当然可以观看。‎ ‎42. B。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。查看中央电视台1频道所有的节目没有一个是播放足球赛的，所以这个陈述是错误的。‎ ‎43. A。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。从表中我们可以看到，15点30分陕西电视台4频道播放电视剧，母亲完全可以看。‎ ‎44. B。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。从表中可以看到，查看中央电视台6频道所有的节目没有一个是六岁的妹妹看的儿童节目。‎ ‎45. B。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。今天晚上我很忙，因此不可能看电视。‎ 再看2004年阅读理解B部分：‎ B) 阅读下面连篇短文，从个小题所给的四个选项中选出能回答所提问题或完成所给句子的最佳答案。（共10小题，计20分）‎ ‎ (B)‎ ‎ The undersea world is very beautiful. Now more and more people want to dive in ‎ the water to find the secrets there. Scuba diving is a new sport today. It can take you ‎ into a wonderful undersea world.‎ ‎ You will find many strange animals in the sea. Some are as large as a school bus. ‎ Many sea animals give out light in the dark and some have sharp teeth.‎ ‎ During the day, there is enough light. Here, under the sea, everything is blue and ‎ green. When fish swim nearby, you can catch them with your hands. When you have ‎ bottles of air on your back, you can stay in deep water for a long time. However, you ‎ can’t dive too deep. And you must be very careful when you dive in deep water.‎ ‎ The deep sea is not an easy place to live in. It’s cold, and it’s dark, too. The deeper ‎ it is, the less sunlight there is. At about 3,000 feet, there is no light at all. It is dark in ‎ the sea. Many fishes have no eyes. Some have big eyes. A few have eyes on one side.‎ ‎ Besides (除了) the cold and darkness, deep-sea animals face a third danger --- ‎ other animals. ‎ ‎ Animals eat! They must find food to eat. Many animals eat plants. However, some ‎ Animals eat meat. This means these sea animals have animals have two big jobs.They ‎ need to find animals as food, and they have to try not to become other animals’ meal.‎ ‎46. Why do people want to dive in the sea? Because ________.‎ ‎ A. they want to catch fish ‎ B. they want to find the secrets of the undersea world ‎ C. the sea is deep ‎ D. there are all kinds of plants in the sea ‎47. In the daytime, when you dive in the sea, you _________.‎ ‎ A. can see everything green and blue ‎ B. can’t be in danger ‎ C. can atch nothing ‎ D. can’t see anything clearly ‎48. How many dangers will animals meet in the deep sea?‎ ‎ A. One. B. Two. C. Three. D. Four.‎ ‎49. When you do scuba diving, you can __________.‎ ‎ A. stay in deep water for a long time ‎ B. dive very, very deep ‎ C. live in deep water easily ‎ D. dive freely without any dangers ‎50. Which of the following is WRONG?‎ ‎ A. One animals finds something to eat, and it may be eaten by others.‎ ‎ B. At the depth of 3,000 feet under the sea, many animals can find their way by hearing and feeling.‎ ‎ C. The deeper the sea is, the darker and colder it is.‎ ‎ D. At the depth of 3,000 feet under the sea, all animals can find their way by seeing.‎ ‎46. B。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。文章开头的第二句明确说明了这一点。“现在越来越多的人想潜水，为的是寻找海下世界的秘密”。‎ ‎47. A。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。文章第三段开头就说明了这一事实。“During the day, there is enough light. Here, under the sea, everything is blue ‎ and green.”‎ ‎48. C。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。文章的第5段说明了这一问题：Besides ‎ ‎(除了) the cold and darkness, deep-sea animals face a third danger --- other animals.‎ ‎49. A。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。文章的第三段有这样一句话：When you ‎ have bottles of air on your back, you can stay in deep water for a long time. 背着 ‎ 空气瓶潜水就是“scuba diving”。‎ ‎50. D。这是一道考查细节和事实的题目。文章的第四段有这样的叙述：At about ‎ ‎3,000 feet, there is no light at all. It is dark in the sea. Many fishes have no eyes.‎ 在3，‎000米的深处，一点光线都没有，很多于都没有眼睛，他们怎麽能够通 过“看”来找到路呢？‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ ‎ (1)‎ 根据下面一篇短文的内容判断下列句子的正误，正确的用”A”表示，错误的用“B”表示。‎ Young people are often unhappy when they are with their parents. They say that their parents don’t understand them. They often think their parents are too strict with them, and they are never given a free hand.‎ Parents often find it difficult to win their children’s trust(信任) and they seem to forget how they themselves felt when they were young.‎ For example, young people like to do things without much thinking. It’s one of their ways to show that they grow up and they can do with any difficult things. Older people worry more easily. Most of them plan (计划) things ahead and don’t like their plans to be changed.‎ When you want your parents to let you do something, you will have better success (成功) if you ask before you really start doing it.‎ Young people often make their parents angry by clothes they want, the music they enjoy and something else. But they don’t mean to cause (引起) any trouble. They just feel that in this way they can be cut off from the old people’s world and they want to make a new culture (文化) of their own.‎ ‎ And if their parents don’t like their music or clothes or their manner of speech, the young people feel very unhappy.‎ Sometimes you even don’t want your parents to say, “Yes” to what you do. You want to stay at home alone and do what you like.‎ If you plan to control (控制) your life, you’d better win your parents trust and try to get them to understand you. If your parents see that you have high sense of responsibility (责任感), they will certainly give you the right to do what you want to do.‎ ‎1. When young people are with their parents, they don’t feel pleased.‎ ‎2. What young people think is different from what older people do.‎ ‎3. What young people do is to make their parents unhappy.‎ ‎4. When children grow up, they hope to let them do everything alone.‎ ‎5. If you try to get your parents to understand you, you must do well in everything.‎ ‎ (2)‎ 根据下面一篇短文的内容判断下列句子的正误，正确的用“A”表示，错误的用“B”表示。‎ Yesterday evening, when I went to town with my mother, we met a strange old man. It was raining hard and we had no umbrella (伞). We were trying to get into a taxi when he came up to us. He was carrying a nice umbrella and he said that he would give it to us for only a pound. He had forgotten his wallet, he said, needed taxi-fare (出租汽车费) to go back home. My mother didn’t believe what he had said at first, and asked him a lot of questions. But the old man didn’t get into a taxi. We followed (跟随) him and found he went into a pub (小酒店) and bought himself a glass of whiskey (威士忌) with the pound. After he drank it, he put on his hat and took up one of the many wet umbrellas there and went off with the new one. Soon after that, he sold it again.‎ ‎1. The old man sold an umbrella to the writer and her mother.‎ ‎2. He gave it to them for only a pound because he had forgotten his wallet and needed taxi fare to go back home.‎ ‎3. The umbrella was worth more than one pound.‎ ‎4. The old man sold his own umbrella.‎ ‎5. He was an honest man.‎ ‎ (3)‎ 根据下面一篇短文的内容判断下列句子的正误，正确的用”A”表示，错误的用“B”表示。‎ In 1605, a scientist took a willow branch(柳枝) and planted it. He didn’t plant it in the ground, however. He planted it in a vase of soil(泥土). For the next five years, the scientist watered that willow carefully. The willow grew and grew. Where did it get the food for its growth? To most people, this was an easy question. The willow plant, of course, took the food from the soil. The scientist, however, wanted evidence(证据).If the willow took the food from the soil for its growth, then, as it grew and weighed more, the soil ought to weigh less. He weighed the willow branch before he planted it. It weighed five pounds. Then he weighed the soil. It weighed 200 pounds. After five years, he weighed the plant and the soil again. The willow tree weighed 169 pounds, but the soil weighed almost the same. The result(结果) was surprising. Where did the 164 pounds come from? After many investigations(调查), the scientist got the answer. He had given water to the willow, and the willow got its food from the water.‎ He was right, in a way. Today we know more about the question.‎ ‎1. The scientist did the experiment in the sixteenth century.‎ ‎2. Most people thought the plant got the food from the soil for its growth.‎ ‎3. The soil in the vase weighed two hundred pounds.‎ ‎4. The scientist found that the willow grew and weighed more and the soil weighed less. ‎5. The soil weighed 164 pounds after five years. ‎6. Now we know about the question as much as the scientist did.‎ ‎ (4)‎ 根据下面一篇短文的内容判断下列句子的正误，正确的用”A”表示，错误的用“B”表示。‎ One afternoon Bob and Jane were walking along a quiet street when they heard a big noise from the street corner. They ran there and found that a small car had knocked into the side of a truck. Both the car driver and the truck driver were hurt. ‎“Bob,” said Jane, “run back down the road to Mrs Day’s house. Ask her to call the police and the ambulance(救护车). Hurry up. I’ll stay here.” Bob went off as fast as he could. There was nothing Jane could do but wait. She knew that when people were hurt in an accident，they shouldn’t be moved. It wasn’t long before the police car and the ambulance arrived. The policemen got the car door open and moved the man out. Then they got the truck driver out. Luckily，the men weren’t badly hurt，but they were both taken to hospital. The policemen thanked Bob and Jane. “You were very good to act so quickly when you saw the accident. Thank you for all your help.” ‎1. The accident happened in a quiet street one afternoon.‎ ‎2. Bob，Jane，Mrs Day and the policemen heard the noise.‎ ‎3. Both of the drivers were hurt in the accident. ‎4. Jane asked Bob to call the police. ‎5. Jane had got the drivers out before the policemen arrived.‎ ‎ (5)‎ In America, just as in Europe, men usually open doors for women, and women always walk ahead of men into a room or a restaurant, unless （除非）the men have to be ahead of the ladies to choose the table, to open the door of a car or do some other things like the above On the street, men almost always walk or cross the street on the closer side of the ladies to the traffic But if a man walks with two ladies, he should walk between them Then if the host （男主人）or hostess （女主人）or both of them come in a car to get their guest for dinner, the guest should sit at the front seat and leave the back seat though there is no people sitting on it 1．In America men usually _______ A．walk ahead of women  B．eat in a restaurant C．walk behind women    D．drive a car to work 2．In the street men ________ ‎ ‎ A．cross the street B．walk on the right side of the ladies C．walk on the closer side of the ladies to the traffic D．walk near the ladies 3．If a man walks with two ladies, he should _________ A．walk between them   B．run before them   C．follow them   D．go away 4．If Mrs. Green wants you to her house in a car, you should _________ A．sit beside a guest    B．sit at the front seat C．sit at the back seat  D．drive the car ‎ (6)‎ Last Sunday I saw the worst storm（暴风雨）in years It came suddenly and went on for more than three hours After lunch, I went into my room to have a rest. The air was hot, and all was quiet Then strong wind started blowing into my room Pieces of paper on my desk flew high into the air and some flew out of the open window As I ran out to catch them, big drops of rain began to fall. When I came back into the house, it was raining harder and harder I tried very hard to close the window Then I heard a loud crashing（碰撞的）sound from the back of the house. I ran out of my room to rind out what it was, a big tree had fallen down and broken the top of the back room. 1．Before the storm, the weather was __________ A．cold   B．cool   C．warm   D．hot 2．The wind blew some of the paper ___________ A．all over the floor   B．out of the door C．into the back room   D．out of the open window 3．The top of the back room was broken because of __________ A．the strong   B．the falling tree   C．the rain   D．the crashing sound ‎ (7)‎ Light travels at a speed which is about a million times faster than the speed of sound. You can get some idea of this difference by watching the start of a race. If you stand some distance away from the starter, you can see smoke from his gun before the sound reaches your ears. This great speed of light produces some strange facts Sunlight takes about 8 minutes to reach us If you look at the light of the moon tonight, remember that the light rays left the moon 1.3 seconds before they reached you The nearest star is so far away that the light that you can see from it tonight started to travel towards you four years ago at a speed of nearly 2 million km. per minute. In some cases, the light from one of tonight's stars had started on its journey to you before you were born. Thus, if we want to be honest, we can't say, "The stars are shining tonight" We have to say instead, "The stars look pretty They were shining four years ago, but their light has only just reached the earth." 1．Light speed is ________ sound speed A．as fast as B．a million times slower than C．about millions of times faster than ‎ ‎ D．about a million times faster than 2．If you stand 200 metres away from a man who is firing a gun to start a race, you ‎ will find out that _______ A．you can hear the sound before you see the smoke B．the sound does not travel as fast as light C．the sound will reach you before the man fires D．sound travels about a million times faster than light ‎3．Sunlight obviously（明显地）_________ than the light of the moon A．has to travel a greater distance   B．moves less quickly C．travels much more quickly          D．is less powerful（有力的）‎ ‎4．The scientific way of saying "The stars are shining tonight" should be ________ A．the stars have been shining all the time B．the stars seen tonight will shine four years later C．the stars were shining long ago but seen tonight D．the starlight seen today could be seen four years ago ‎ (8)‎ Drinking too much alcohol （酒，酒精）seems to give pleasure to many people Habit alone can keep people drinking However, many heavy drinkers can offer some other reasons for their actions. Right now doctors are getting some attention in their protests against heavy drinking. Many people have cut down on their drinking In general, everyone believes the doctors' warnings. It is sometimes very easy to stop drinking heavily. For example, at a party a man has just one drink. He can stop thinking about having another one. Both health considerations and the high cost of drinking help him to stay away from alcohol. All of his friends help, too. They always understand his problem and are really concerned. The heavy drinker needs friends like these. 1．Drinking too much alcohol ________ A．seems to give pleasure to many people B．is a habit C．is reasonable D．will do good to people 2．Paragraph（段落）2 says: A．Doctors are against heavy drinking B．People usually believe the doctors' warnings C．Many people have cut down on their drinking D．all of the above 3．A heavy drinker _________ A．believes the doctors' warnings B．has no reasons for drinking C．needs friends to help him stop drinking heavily D．can't stay away from ‎ alcohol 4．The best title for the passage is ________ A．Alcohol   B．No Drinking   C．A Heavy Drinker   D．Give It Up ‎ (9)‎ Tom didn't live too far away from school. So he went there and came back on foot every day. On his way to school he passed a wet playground when it rained. One day the boy came home very wet. His mother became very angry and said, "Don't play in the water on your way home or to school."‎ The next day he came home very wet again. His mother became even angrier. "I will tell your father if you come home wet again," she said, "Then he'll punish you."‎ The next day the young boy was dry when he came home from school. "You were a good boy today," his mother said, "You didn't play in the water," "No," he answered sadly, "There were so many big boys in the water when I got there this afternoon that there wasn't any room for me at all."‎ ‎1. There was a ______ on his way to school.‎ A. park   B. lake   C. playground   D. river ‎2.Tom's mother got angry because ________.‎ A.Tom was all wet           B.Tom was dry C.Tom didn't go to school   D.it rained ‎3.The meaning of the underlined word punish is ________.‎ A.同意   B.惩罚   C.怜悯     D.放弃 ‎ ‎ (10)‎ WHERE TO STAY IN BOSWELL YOUR GUIDE TO OUR BEST HOTELS Name / Address ‎ Room Number ‎ Single Room ‎ Double Room ‎ Special Attractions ‎ FIRST HOTEL ‎222 Edward Road Tel. 4146433 ‎ ‎120 ‎ ‎$25 ‎ ‎$35 ‎ Air-conditioned (空调) rooms French restaurant Night club Swimming pool Shops Coffee shop and bar Telephone, radio and TV set in each room Close to the city center ‎ FAIRVIE HOTEL 129 North Road Tel. 5915620 ‎ ‎450 ‎ ‎$12 ‎ ‎$18 ‎ Close to the airport Telephone in each room Bar, Restaurant, Garage (车库) Swimming pool ‎ ORCHARD HOTEL ‎233 Edward Road Tel. 6416446 ‎ ‎470 ‎ ‎$15 ‎ ‎$20 ‎ Facing First Hotel European (欧式的) restaurant TV set Coffee shop Laundry (洗衣店) ‎ and dry-cleaning shops ‎ OSAKA HOTEL ‎12364 Venning Road Tel. 6438200 ‎ ‎180 ‎ ‎$30 ‎ ‎$50 ‎ Air-conditioned (空调) rooms Japanese and Chinese restaurants Swimming pool Large garden Shops ‎ Choose the best answers according to the table above.‎ ‎1.If you want to eat Chinese food, you will go to the restaurant in ________.‎ A.the Fairview Hotel B.the First Hotel C.the Orchard Hotel D.the Osaka Hotel ‎2.The cheapest price for a single bed is ________ in ______ in Boswell.‎ A.$12, the First Hotel   B.$15, the Osaka Hotel C.$12, the Fairview Hotel   D.$25, the Orchard Hotel ‎3.The number of the rooms in the hotel with the best special attractions is _______.‎ A.120    B.470    C.450   D.180‎ ‎4.If a Japanese traveler likes to eat in a French restaurant, _________ is the right place for him to go to.‎ A.233 Edward Road    B.12364 Venning Road C.222 Edward Road    D.129 North Road ‎5.Which hotel faces the Orchard Hotel?‎ A.The First Hotel   B.The Osaka Hotel C.The Fairview Hotel   D.No Hotel ‎ (11)‎ Ron is ten years old. He loves to watch TV. But for one full year he did not watch TV at all. What was the reason? Ron’s parents said they would give him $ 600 if he didn’t watch TV for a year.‎ Ron’s parents thought he watched too much TV. One day his mother saw a news- paper story about a boy who didn’t watch TV for a year. She showed the story to Ron. Ron liked the idea. He turned off the TV right away, and said, “It doesn’t bother me not to watch TV. I just want the money.”‎ At first, Ron’s parents were very happy. Ron read books and newspapers, played outside, played computer games, and played cards with his mother. But after some time, he got bored(厌烦). Every morning, he asked his parents, “What are we doing tonight?” Sometimes his mother and father wished he would watch TV just for one evening. Ron always said, “No, it would cost me money!”‎ Finally the year was over. Then Ron stared watching his favourite TV shows all day long again. Ron got the money from his parents. What does he plan to do with the $ 600? “I want to buy myself a TV set!” he said.‎ ‎1. Ron didn’t watch TV for one year because ________.‎ ‎ A. he wanted the money B. watching TV too much is bad ‎ C. he wanted to study harder D. he wanted to learn from the boy ‎2. “It doesn’t bother me not to watch TV” means “It’s _______ to watch TV”.‎ ‎ A. waste time B. important for me ‎ C. not use D. not important for me ‎3. Ron thought _________ for him to read and play all the time.‎ ‎ A. it was great fun B. it was no fun ‎ C. it was enjoyable D. it was good ‎4. Ron’s last words would _______ his parents.‎ ‎ A. please B. frighten C. surprise D. excite ‎5. The best title for the story is _______.‎ ‎ A. A Funny Story B. A Year without TV ‎ C. A Good Boy D. Buying a TV Set ‎ (12)‎ J.K. Rowling is the writer of Harry Potter, which is now one of the bestsellers in the world.‎ J.K. Rowling was born in Bristol on July 31st, 1965. She has one sister who is two years younger than her. Both girls loved listening to their father reading bedtime stories to them. They especially loved stories about magical worlds. Rowling wrote her first story, called Rabbit, at the age of six.‎ After she graduated from the university, Rowling worked as a translator(翻译者)‎ in London. During this time, on a long train trip in the summer of 1990, the idea came to her of a boy who has magic but doesn’t know it. In 1992 Rowling began to teach English. She lived with her baby daughter, Jessica, and spent much time finishing the first Harry Potter book for young readers. It appeared in June 1997. To her surprise, the book was greatly successful. The film came out in November 2001. Now Harry Potter series(系列) is popular with people of all ages and about 60 million books were sold in 200 countries.‎ Why has the series been so successful? There are a few things. Many other magical stories take place in faraway lands or in past or future times. But Harry lives in modern(现代的) England. He’s also a very normal(平常的) boy: polite, friendly, brave and clever. So when other children read about Harry, they can imagine being like him.‎ J.K. Rowling is very happy with the success, and she is now busy finishing the whole series of seven books. She’s writing full time and she’s really enjoying life. She says she will go on living a normal life with her daughter and writing children’s books.‎ ‎1. From the passage, we know ___________. A. J.K. Rowling met a boy named Harry on a long train trip B. J.K. Rowling loved listening to stories when she was very young C. J.K. Rowling is two years younger than her sister D. Harry Potter is J.K. Rowling’s first story ‎2. The first Harry Potter book came out in __________. ‎ A. July 1965‎ B. the summer of 1990‎ C. June 1997‎ D. November 2001 ‎3. The Harry Potter series is __________. A. written for young people ‎ B. only enjoyed by children C. only sold in England D. about a young inspector ‎4. J.K. Rowling has been successful, and she ___________. A. likes to travel all over the world with her daughter B. is too busy to enjoy her life C. is excited about her success every day D. is still writing stories for children ‎5. How is Harry Potter series different from other magical stories? ‎ A. There are magical things. ‎ B. The stories happened in the modern world.‎ C. It has seven books. ‎ D. It took much time to finish.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ ‎(1) 1.A 2.A 3.B 4.A 5.B ‎ ‎(2)1.A 2.B 3.A 4.B 5.B ‎ ‎(3)1.B 2.A 3.A 4.B 5.B 6.B ‎(4)1.A 2.B 3.A 4.B 5.B ‎(5)1.C 2.C 3.A 4.B ‎ ‎(6)1.D 2.D 3.B ‎ ‎(7)1.D 2.B 3.A 4.C ‎ ‎(8)1.A 2.D 3.C 4.D ‎(9)1.C  2.A  3.B  44.C  45.A  46.D  47.C  48.D  49.A  50.D  ‎ ‎(10)1.D  2.C  3.A  4.C  5.A ‎(11)1.A 2.D 3.B 4.C 5.B ‎(12)1.B 2.C 3.A 4.D 5.B ‎（18）短文填空考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十八、短文填空及其解题方法 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 短文填空是近两年才创设的一种新题型。这种题型通常有四种形式：‎ ‎1、给出一篇难易适中的短文，中间去掉几个单词，让考生根据上下文填上所缺的单词。‎ ‎2、给出一篇难易适中的短文，中间去掉几个单词，但给出这些单词的第一个字母，让考生根据短文的上下文的意思和所给的提示字母，填上所缺的单词。‎ ‎3、给出一篇难易适中的短文，中间去掉几个单词，同时在一个方框内给出一些单词，让考生根据短文的内容，把这些单词填入空白处，使文章正确、通顺。‎ ‎4、给出一篇难易适中的短文，中间去掉几个单词或短语，同时给出这些单词或短语的汉语意思，让考生根据短文的上下文和所给汉语的提示，填上适当的单词或短语。陕西省的短文填空题采用的基本上是第四种形式。‎ 这种题型考查的是考生的整体阅读能力、基础语法的运用能力和书面表述能力，特别是单词和短语的拼写能力。它是介于阅读理解和书面表达之间的一种题型。‎ 陕西省中考英语题中的短文填空题又有什麽具体特点呢？‎ ‎1、从文体上看，议论文和叙事文为主。‎ ‎2002年陕西省的短文填空题所给的短文是一篇论说文，论说的主题是：只有母亲的爱是真正的爱。2003年的中考说明样题所给的短文是一篇叙事文。讲述的是圣诞节的情况。2003年的中考题中的短文填空题也是一篇叙事文。讲述的是主题是因特网的历史。2004年是一篇论说文。‎ ‎2、从填空的内容上看，以词组和短语为主。‎ ‎2002年短文填空题共有10个空，其中6个空填的是词组和短语。2003年中考说明中短文填空题共有10个空，其中7个空填的是词组和短语。2003年中考题中的短文填空题共有10个空，其中5个空填的是词组和短语。2004年的短文填空题10个空中有6个是词组和短语。也就是说短文填空题要填的词组和短语总体上保持在5-7个。‎ ‎3、从考查的范围上看，以英语的一些特殊用法为主。‎ ‎2002年的短文填空题考到了enough作副词，放在被修饰词之后的用法，考到了“with+名词”构成的介词短语的用法。2003年中考说明中的短文填空题又一次出现了“with+名词”构成的介词短语用法。2003年中考题的短文填空题考查了something wrong这样的形容词后置的特殊用法。2004年的短文填空题考查了twice a day 这样的特殊表示方式。‎ ‎4、从所留的空白上看，以给出汉语提示为主。‎ ‎2003年中考说明的短文填空题共留出10个空白，其中8处给出了汉语提示，2处没有任何提示。2003年中考的短文填空题同样是10个空白，全部给出了汉语提示。2004年10个空白全部给了汉语提示。‎ ‎【名师解难】‎ ‎ 做好短文填空题要求考生具备坚实的语法基础，理解文章大意和主旨的能力，牢固掌握英语的习惯用法和固定搭配，熟记英语单词的拼写。做短文填空可以从以下几个方面着手：‎ ‎1、从语法方面考虑 短文填空题所涉及的语法内容通常包括：名词的单复数、形容词和副词的比较等级、主谓一致、动词的时态和语态、介词和连词的选用等。例如2003年中考的短文填空题的第一个空：“Most of us 1 (忙于)talking about and using the Internet every day….” 在这里，用英语表示“忙于”不仅要用busy, busy之前还要加be, 而be还要和主语most of us保持一致，变成are。再如2004年中考题中的第7个空，but soon you’ll 7 _____(习惯于) doing it. “习惯于”必须用be / get used to, 因为这个短语用在一般将来时中，在助动词之后。‎ ‎2、从习惯用法和固定搭配方面考虑 如上所说，陕西省的短文填空以词组和短语为主，而词组和短语必然会涉及到很多习惯用法和固定搭配。例如2003年中考说明短文填空的第8个空：“ 8 （在圣诞夜）children are very happy.” 用英语表示“在圣诞夜”必须用On Christmas Eve。因为在“某一天的晚上”习惯上用介词on。2004年考题中的第5个空就是一个固定搭配---at least。‎ ‎3、从上下文的结构方面考虑 有的空白必须根据上下文的结构才能判断应该填什麽样的单词或短语。例如2003年考试说明短文填空的第9个空：They put their stocking at the end of their beds 9 their parents can put presents in them.从上下文文我们可以看出，他们把他们的长筒袜放在床头上是为了让他们的父母亲能够把礼物放在里面。以此判断，后面的句子应是一个目的状语从句。因此，应填so that。再看2004年的10个空Eat a lot of fruits and vegetables and drink water 10_______ (代替) drinks. 这个句子中已经有了谓语动词eat 和drink, 代替就不能再用动词，而需用一个介词instead of。‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎（2004年陕西省中考试题）‎ V. 短文填空（共10空，每空1分，计10分）‎ ‎ 根据上下文和括号里的汉语提示，在下面的空白处写出正确的单词和短语，使短文意思完整。‎ ‎ When you laugh, you will 1 ______(张开) your mouth and your teeth. The healthier those teeth are, the happier you look. Why is that?‎ ‎ It’s 2 _______(因为) your teeth are important in many ways. If you take care of them, they’ll help to take care of you. Strong, healthy teeth help you eat the right food to help you grow. They also help you speak clearly.‎ ‎ You can take care of your teeth by doing like these:‎ ‎ Brush your teeth 3_______ (一日两次) after breakfast and before bedtime. If you can, brush 4 _______(午饭后) or after eating sweet cakes.‎ ‎ Brush all of your teeth, not just the front ones. Spend some time on the teeth along the sides and in the back.‎ ‎ Take your time while brushing. Spend 5_______ (至少) 3 minutes each time you brush. ‎ ‎ Be sure your toothbrush is soft(柔软的). Ask your parent to help you get a new toothbrush 6 ________(每三个月).‎ ‎ Learn how to floss(用牙线清理) your teeth, which is a very important way to keep them healthy. It feels strange when you do it at first, but soon you’ll 7 _____(习惯于) doing it. The floss gets rid of food that’s hidden between your teeth.‎ ‎ Brushing and flossing 8 ______(保持) your teeth healthy. You also need to care about what you eat and drink. Eat 9 ______(许多) fruits and vegetables and drink water 10_______ (代替) drinks.‎ ‎1. open 张开嘴的“张开”应用open。‎ ‎2. because 要回答前面why提出的问题，应用because。‎ ‎3. twice a day 这是英语常见的一种表示方法。‎ ‎4. after lunch after之后常常跟一个时间点，lunch可看作一个时间点。‎ ‎5. at last 这是一个固定的短语 ‎6. every three months every之后如果有大于一的数词来修饰名词，这个名词用复数形式。又如：every three days, every four years。‎ ‎7. be/ get used to 这也是一个习惯用语，后接名词或定名词。‎ ‎8. keep “keep somebody/ something +形容词”是一个常见句型。‎ ‎9. lots of / a lot of / many 这几个限定词都可用来修饰可数名词的复数。‎ ‎10. instead of 这是一个短语介词，后接名词活动名词。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ ‎ (1)‎ Everyone needs friends. We all like to feel close to someone. It is nice to have a friend to talk, laugh, and do things with. Surely, there are times when we need to be alone. We don't always want people1________(周围). But we would feel lonely if we never had a friend.‎ No two people are just the same. Sometimes friends don't 2_________(相处得好). That doesn't mean that they no longer like 3_________(互相). Most of the time they will make up and 4__________(继续)being friends.‎ Sometimes friends move away. Then we feel very sad. We 5_______(想念) them very much. But we call them and write to them. It could be that we would even see them again. And we can 6__________(结交新朋友）. It is surprising to find out how much we like new people when we get to know them.‎ Families sometimes name their children after a close friend. 7_________(许多地方)are named after men and women who have been friendly to people in a town. Some libraries are named this way. So are some schools. We 8_______（想起）these people when we go to these places.‎ There's more good news for people who have friends. They live 9________(长一些)than people who don't. Why? It could be that they are happier. Being happy helps you stay well. Or it could be just knowing that someone cares. If someone cares about you, you take better care of 10________（你自己）.‎ ‎ (2)‎ ‎ Most great inventors often met with much trouble in their work. Before they could succeed, they had to overcome 1_________(数以千计的)difficulties which were put in their way. The following is one of such examples.‎ ‎ George Stephenson (1781~~1848), a 2__________ (著名的)British inventor made the first train in 1825, using a stream engine. When he was experimenting with the engine 3________ (在火车上), he met with troubles from the government, the newspapers and the gentlemen in the country. They said that the 4________ (噪音)and the smoke would kill cows, horses and sheep, that the engine would burst or that the hot coals from it would set fire to their houses. People believe 5___________ (他们说的话).‎ ‎ George Stephenson told the people that the train could go on small rails, could pull carriages 6________ (装满) goods and passengers and that there was no great danger to them. It was a very difficult matter for him to make them believe. 7________ (然而), after some time, he was able to do it, and the first train, that was driven by George Stephenson himself proved what he had said. On the train there was a new steam engine. It was invented by him, and was proved a complete 8_______ (成功). ‎ ‎ The first day when the train ran on the rails, people along the way heard the noise of the train in the distance, and saw it running quickly to them. They thought it was a genie. They ran quickly back home for fear and closed their doors tightly. They did not dare to 9________ (出来)until it had passed. 10________ (一周以后)an old woman still said that her hen had been so frightened that it hadn't laid any eggs for three days.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ ‎ (3)‎ Most of American businesses are open five days a week. American school children attend school five days a week as well.‎ ‎ American families usually have a 1 ______（两天）weekend. The weekend is Saturday and Sunday. Over the weekend people spend their time 2 _______ (以许多不同的方式) . Many families enjoy weekends 3 ______(一起) . They may go shopping, go for a drive or visit friends. They may also invite friends over and 4 ______ (聚会) at home. Many American families participate（参加）in sports during the weekend. 5 _______ (跑步), biking, playing volleyball and swimming 6 _____ (流行)in summer. Skiing and skating are the 7 _____ (最喜爱的) winter sports.‎ ‎ Weekends are also a time for American families to work on something in their yards or in 8 ______(他们的) houses. Many families plant flowers and have vegetable gardens. Some families use the weekends 9 _______（粉刷）or repair their houses. 10 ______(对大部分美国人来说), weekends are very busy.‎ ‎ (4)‎ ‎ Perhaps more than any other people, Americans have come to depend on their cars. The family car 1 _________(一直是) a common thing 2 _______(从……以来) the early twentieth century, and it has changed American life. Many people have moved 3 _______(外面) of the large cities to the suburbs. Some Americans spend 4 ________(每天两小时) or more in their cars 5 _______ (去上班) and home again. Cars have become the 6 _______ (工具) of transportation for most Americans going shopping, and even going on vacations.‎ ‎ Americans 7 ______(过去常常) like big cars, and gasoline used to be very inexpensive. Recently, 8 _______（然而）, the cost of gasoline has increased, smaller cars have become 9 _______（更常见）. Also foreign cars have become very common. Americans have bought 10 _______（大量的）Japanese and German cars. They have bought cars from several other countries as well.‎ ‎ (5)‎ ‎ Each morning a rich man found a poor man sitting on a park bench（长凳）. The poor man always sat there, 1___________ (看着)the big hotel in which the rich man lived. 2_________（有一天）the rich man got out of his car and said to the poor man, "Excuse me, but I just want to know why you sit here and look at my hotel 3_________ (每天早晨)." "Sir," said the poor man, "I am a failure. I have no money, no home. I sleep 4________ (在这条长凳上), and every night I dream（梦想）that one day I'll sleep in that hotel." The rich man said, "Tonight your dream will 5________ (变为现实). I'll pay for the best room in that hotel for you a whole month."‎ ‎ 6_________ (几天以后), the rich man went by the poor man's room to ask him how he was enjoying himself. 7___________ (使他惊讶的是), he found that the man had 8__________ (搬出了)the hotel, back to his park bench. When the rich man asked why, the poor man said, "You see, when I'm down here sleeping on my bench, I dream I'm up there, 9____________ (在那个大宾馆里). It's a wonderful dream. But when I was up there, I dreamed I was back to this cold bench. It was a terrible dream, and I couldn't get any sleep 10________ (根本)."‎ ‎ (6)‎ On October 12, 1989, some Chinese scientists were working at the computers to 1________ (寻找)the information they needed. Suddenly they saw a lot of very bright spots crossing the computers’ screens. 2__________(同时), they stopped their work to check some parts of the computers. To their horror, they 3___________ (发现)that most of their stored information was got rid of by computer viruses! Obviously all these computers had been infected by computer viruses.‎ ‎4___________ (据说)that the computer viruses were made by a group of young men like playing tricks. They all had excellent 5_________ (教育). They created the viruses just to show their intelligence. 6___________ (这种)computer viruses is named Jerusalem Viruses. These viruses can stay in computers 7___________ (很长时间). When the time comes they will attack the computers by lowering the functions, damaging their normal programs or even getting rid of all the information..‎ We now come to know that Jerusalem Viruses often attack computers 8__________ （在星期五）and they are spreading to a lot of computers. Among the countries that suffered computer viruses are Britain, Switzerland, the US and some 9________ (其它的)countries. But till now how to get rid of the terrible viruses 10__________ (仍然是)a problem.‎ ‎ （7）‎ ‎ In American high school 1 _______(大多数) students take English, science, math and history.‎ ‎ 2 _______(在英语课堂上) , the students study grammar and read famous literature. In science class, they study biology, chemistry or physics. History is 3 ________(更有趣) to some students because they learn about important events and places 4 ________(在美国) . Students take 5 ______（其它） courses, too. These are electives. Some study 6 ________（音乐）because they feel it is more enjoyable. Some study 7 _________（计算机科学）because they 8 ________(认为)it is more practical.‎ ‎ 9 ______（在各自课堂上） , teachers give students exams. Some exams are more difficult than others, but a good student can always do 10 ______（好）.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ (8)‎ ‎ One kind of vacation that many Americans enjoy is camping. Each summer 1_____ (数百万的) Americans drive to the countryside where they find places 2_____ （野营）. The national parks, many of which are 3 _____(在山里) , are favourite camping places. Campers enjoy the 4 _______（新鲜空气）, the lakes and the forests which they find in these parks. Campers hike, swim and fish. They can also find 5 ______（许多种）animals and plants in the parks. Mostly campers have trailers which they drive or pull behind their cars to their campsites. Trailers are like houses 6 ______（在轮子上）. They have many conveniences which people have in their homes, 7_______（例如）electricity and hot water. But 8 _______（大多数） campers don’t have trailers. They camp in tents which they 9________ （搭起）in their campsites. Campers in tents don’t have the conveniences that campers in trailers have. Tent campers enjoy 10 _________(一种简单的生活) .‎ ‎ （9）‎ ‎ All big cities are quite similar. Living in a modern Asian city is not very 1 （不同於）living in an American city. The same cannot be said about living 2 （在农场上）, however.‎ ‎ In many parts of the world, farmers and their families live 3 (在村庄和城镇里). In the United States, however, each farm family lives on its own fields, often beyond the sight of any neighbors. 4 （不用） traveling from a village to the fields every morning, American farmers stay 5 （在他们的土地上）throughout the week. They travel to the nearest town 6 （在星期六）for shopping or on Sundays for church. The children ride on buses to large schools which serve 7 (所有的农场家庭) living in the area. In some areas, there are small schools serving a few farm families, and the children walk to school.‎ ‎ 8 （当然）life keeps changing for everyone, including farmers. Today there are cars, good roads, radios, and television sets. And of course there are modern machines for farming. All of these have changed farm life.‎ ‎ For many years, however, farming in America was often a lonely way of living. Farmers 9 （不得不）deal with their own problems, instead of getting help from others. They 10 （学会）to try new methods, and to trust their own ideas instead of following older ways.‎ ‎ (10)‎ A teacher from a western country visited a school in an 1_______ (东方国家). In one class, she watched sixty children as they learned 2_______ (画)a cat. The teacher drew a big ○ 3_________ (在黑板上), and sixty children copied it on their papers. The teacher drew a small ○ on the top of the first and then put two △△ on top of it. The children drew 4_________ (以同样的方式). The lesson went on until there were sixty-one cats in the classroom. Each student’s cat 5________ (看上去)exactly like the one on the board. The visiting teacher watched the lesson and 6________ (感到惊讶). The teaching methods(ways) were very much different from the way of teaching in her country. A children’s art lesson in her own country produced a roomful of pictures, each one is quite 7_________ (不同于)the others. Why? What makes this difference in educational methods? In a classroom in any country, the teacher teaches more than art or history or language. ‎8__________ (在一个国家里)such as the United States or Canada, students are asked to work by themselves and find answers 9_________ (他们自己). The students are helped to learn to have their own ideas. In countries such as China and Japan, students often work together and help each other in the classroom, but the teachers teach and the students listen. The students are asked to memorize a lot. They 10__________ (必须)learn the same textbook. They do the same homework and give the same answers. ‎ (11)‎ He was born in Atlanta, Georgia, on January 15,1929. He was black. He lived 1________ （仅仅）thirty-nine years, but he became world-famous in that short time. He 2 _______(长大) in the southeastern part of the United States. He studied at Morehouse College where he met many outstanding men whose ideas he found important and exciting. There he read the writings of Thoreau, which gave him many ideas 3 ________(关于自由) .‎ ‎ After he graduated from Morehouse, he 4 ______(接着) to study at the University of Pennsylvania, Harvard University, and Boston University. At Boston University, he met his wife, Coretta. 5 ________（1954）, after he got his Ph.D.degree, he became the minister of a small church 6 _________（南方的） . There he became the leader of the black people, who were poor and without power. He gave speeches and led marches. For his ideas and actions, he went to jail 7 ____（一段时间）.‎ ‎ 8 _______(许多年以后), in Washington, D.C., he spoke to a crowd of 250,000 people. He told them, “I have a dream.” That speech is still 9 ______(著名). In 1964 he won the Nobel Peace Prize. His work was not 10______(结束) when he died on April 4, 1968. Who was he? He was Martin Luther King.‎ ‎ (12)‎ Dear Mr. Costa,‎ I’m sorry it has taken me so long to write. I’ve been very busy with work and school, but I’ve 1 ________（想起）you often.‎ How’ve you been lately? Did you have a good Christmas and New Year’s? Mac says you’ve been working hard at the restaurant and that business is very good. What 2 _______(别的) have you been doing?‎ I had a short but good vacation. Mac and I went to Chicago for 3_______ (几天)before Christmas, but I 4 ______(不得不) come back and work between Christmas and New Year’s (including Christmas Day and New Year’s Eve)! 5 _____（每次）something like that 6 _______（发生）I wonder if I really want to work in the hotel business.‎ The other day I was thinking about the fun we used to have 7 ______(在我们英语课堂上). I haven’t seen many of our classmates since the course was over. 8_____ （事实上）, the only one I see very often is Tomiko. I’d really like to get in touch with Franco. Does he 9 _______(曾经) write to you? If so, could you please send me his address?‎ Well, Mac and I are going skating and he 10 ______（在等我）, so I guess I’d better say goodbye now. Write as soon as you can.‎ ‎ Love,‎ ‎ Maria ‎【练习答案】‎ ‎(1)1. around 2. get along well 3. each other 4. go on 5. miss 6. make new friends 7. Many places 8. think of 9. longer 10. yourself ‎(2)1. thousands of 2. famous 3. on the train 4. noise 5. what they said 6. full of 7. However 8. success 9. come out 10. A week later ‎(3)1. two-day 2. in many different ways 3. together 4. have a party 5. Running 6. are popular 7. favourite 8. their 9. to paint 10. For most Americans ‎(4)1. has been 2. since 3. outside 4. two hours a day 5. going to work 6. means 7. used to 8. however 9. more common 10. large numbers of ‎(5)1. looking at 2. One day 3. every morning 4. on this bench 5. come true 6. A few days later 7. To his surprise 8. moved out of 9. in that big hotel 10. at all ‎(6)1. look for 2. At the same moment 3. found out 4. It is said 5. education 6. This kind of 7. for a long time 8. on Fridays 9. other 10. remains ‎(7)1. most 2. In English class 3. more interesting 4. in the United States 5.other 6. music 7. computer science 8. think 9. In each class 10. well ‎(8)1.millions of 2. to camp 3. in the mountains 4. fresh air 5. many kinds of ‎6. on wheels 7. such as 8. most 9. set up 10. a very simple life ‎(9)1. different from 2. on farms 3. in villages or towns 4. Instead of 5. on their land 6. on Saturdays 7. all of the farm families 8. Of course 9. had to10. learned ‎(10)1. eastern country 2. to draw 3. on the blackboard 4. in the same way 5. looked 6. was surprised 7. different from 9. themselves 10. have to ‎(11)1. only 2. grew up 3. about freedom 4. went on 5. In 1954 6. in the south 7. for a short time 8. Many years later 9. famous 10. finished ‎(12)1.thought about 2. else 3. a few days 4. had to 5. Every time 6. happens7. in our English class 8. In fact 9. ever 10. is waiting for me ‎（19）补全对话考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ 十九、补全对话及其解题方法 ‎【考点扫描】‎ ‎ 补全对话是以书面形式考查考生英语口头交际能力和逻辑思维能力的一种题型。该题给考生三段对话，每段对话挖去3-4个句子，让考生把挖去的句子补全。考查点主要是：‎ ‎1. 情景会话能力；‎ ‎2. 逻辑思维能力；‎ ‎【名师解难】‎ 补全对话命题的范围集中在初中阶段学习过的30个交际项目。因此牢固掌握着30个交际项目所包括的各种句型，习惯用语是至关重要的。除此而外，我们还要做到下面几点：‎ ‎1. 通读对话全文，摸清对话发生的地点、时间，人物的身份，对话的内容。‎ ‎2. 理清上下句的逻辑关系，使你填入的话和整篇对话文理通顺，融为一体；‎ ‎3. 符合说英语国家人的习惯，不要按中国人的习惯去应答。‎ ‎4. 注意空白处的标点。是问号就应填问句；是句号，就应填陈述句。‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎ 请看2004年陕西省中考试题：‎ VI. 补全对话（共10空，每空1.5分，计15分）‎ 根据下面对话中的情景，在每空中填入一个适当的语句，使对话恢复完整。‎ ‎ (A)‎ A: Good afternoon, John!‎ B: 1______________, Li Wei.‎ A: I hear you are going to Kunming for a winter holiday.‎ B: Yes, I’ll go next week.‎ A: 2____________________________?‎ B: It’s neither too cold nor too hot. It’s warm there.‎ A: 3____________________________________.‎ B: Thank you.‎ ‎【解析】这段对话发生在John和Li Wei之间。Li Wei 向John问下午好，按照说英语国家人的习惯，John也应该回答下午好，所以第1个空应填：Good afternoon。第二个空的下一句是回答昆明地天气情况，因此我们可以推断，第2个空应该是询问昆明的天气，应填：What’s the weather like in Kunming? / How is the weather there? 从第3个空的答语Thank you，我们可以推断对方一定是说了祝愿的话。所以这个空可以填：Have a good time./ Have a good journey./ I’m sure you will have a good time.‎ ‎ (B)‎ A: Hi, Peter! How are you today?‎ B: 4__________________________________. And you?‎ A: I’m OK. Are you free tomorrow?‎ B: 5__________________________________?‎ A: We’re going to the park. 6____________________?‎ B: Of course. I’d like to go with you. 7___________________?‎ A: We are going to meet at the school gate at one o’clock. Please be there on time.‎ B: OK. Thank you.‎ ‎【解析】这段对话写的是两个熟人见面互相问候并相约去公园的事。第4个空应该是回答对方的问话How are you today?的答语，所以应是：Fine, (I’m fine.) thank you. 第5个空紧接问句Are you free tomorrow? 根据整个谈话的内容判断：应回答Yes, why?/ Yes, what’s up? 第6个空是个问句，因为句末是问号，其答语是：Of course. I’d like to go with you. 由此我们判断，对方是在邀请和他一起到公园去，因此，此空应填：Would you like to go with us?/ Will you go with us? 第7个空又是一个问句，其答语是：We are going to meet at the school gate at one o’clock. Please be there on time. 由此我们判断对方问的是见面的时间和地点，所以应填：When and where are we going to meet?/ When and where shall we meet?‎ ‎ (C)‎ A: Dad. I can’t find my socks. 8__________________?‎ B: Let me see. Are they white?‎ A: Yes. 9______________________?‎ B: I saw them in our sitting-room just now. You may go and get them.‎ A: Oh! Here they are!‎ B: You should put your things away.‎ A: 10____________________________________.‎ ‎【解析】这是父子（女）之间的一段谈话。谈话的内容地找东西。第8个空是个问句，而且空前的句子是Dad. I can’t find my socks. 由此，我们判断：儿子（女儿）是想问父亲见到没有，英语应该是：Have you seen them? 当父亲问他是不是白色的时候，他回答Yes. 既然父亲知道是白色的，那就肯定见到过，因此第9‎ 个空应填儿子（女儿）的问话：你在什麽地方见到的？英语就是：Where did you see them?/ Where are they? 第10个空的前面一句是父亲教训他的话，那末紧接着他应该表示接受。英语就是：Yes, I will./ OK, I will. / OK, I won’t do that again.‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ ‎ (1)‎ A: Hi, Bill! You’re reading the novel again.‎ B: Yes, Tom. I’ll never be tired of it.‎ A: 1____________________________________? B: Three times. Every time I read it, I can always learn something new.‎ A: Really? 2__________________________________________________? B: Charles Dickens. I think he is a great English writer. What about you?‎ A: 3__________________________________________. He is also my favorite foreign writer. Please let me have a look at it. B: OK, here you are! What do you think of this novel?‎ A: 4__________________________________. I haven’t seen such a novel for long. Where did you buy it?‎ B: In the Rose Bookshop.‎ A: I don’t know where it is. 5______________________________________?‎ B: No. Only 10 minutes walk from here, next to the People’s Cinema.‎ A: Oh, I see. I’m going there to get one, too. Thank you!‎ B: You’re welcome!‎ ‎ (2)‎ (Li Meng and John have just finished swimming.)‎ Li Meng: How nice and cool the water is! But I’m feeling a bit hungry now.‎ ‎1______________________________________________ ? John: Sounds good.‎ Li Meng: Do you know 2_____________________________ ?‎ John: Yes, there is.‎ Li Meng: 3____________________________________________？‎ John: It’s only five minutes’ walk. Let’s go.‎ Li Meng: Yeah, let’s go. Oh, I almost forgot my CD player.‎ John: 4______________________________________________ ?‎ Li Meng: Pop music. I often listen when I’m not busy. How about you?‎ John: Light music. I think it can relax myself. 5________________________?‎ Li Meng: Sure.‎ John: OK. I can lend you some CDs. I’ll bring them to our school tomorrow.‎ ‎ (3)‎ Paul: 1____________________________________________? ‎ Fred: No, I don’t. But I have to cook this evening.‎ Paul: 2____________________________________________?‎ Fred: Because my mother is going out on business. I’ll have to cook myself.‎ Paul: 3_____________________________________________?‎ Fred: My mother does. She can cook very well.‎ Paul: Can your father cook?‎ Fred: No, he can’t.‎ Paul: 4______________________________________________?‎ Fred: I’ll cook Italian noodles.‎ Paul: 5______________________________________________!‎ Fred: Thank you. ‎ (4)‎ Mrs Lee: Hello. 68178502.‎ David: Hello.1_______________________________?‎ Mrs Lee: Sorry. 2_______________________. Can I take a message? David: Yes. This is David, Bruce’s friend. I want to ask him for some Chinese ancient coins. He told me he had got some recently. 3__________________________________. I don’t care if they were made of different metals. I just want to add some more coins in my collection.‎ Mrs Lee: OK. I’ll tell him. Would you like him to ring you back later?‎ David: Well, I won’t be at home later this day. Would you please ask him to ring me tomorrow morning? Mrs Lee: Sure. 4______________________________?‎ David: Oh, sorry. 5___________________________________. The new number is 66129853.‎ Mrs Lee: OK. I’ll write a message for him.‎ David: It’s really nice of you, Madam. Thank you very much. Goodbye!‎ Mrs Lee: Bye!‎ ‎ (5)‎ A: Excuse me, I want to go to the library. 1__________________________ ?‎ B: Go down this street and turn right at the second crossing. Go up the road to the end, you’ll find it.‎ A: 2______________________________?‎ B: It’s about 1,000 metres away from here.‎ A: Oh. That’s quite a long way.‎ B: Yes. You’d better take a bus.‎ A: 3__________________________________?‎ B: You can take the No.5 bus. It’ll take you there.‎ A: 4__________________________________?‎ B: It takes about fifteen minutes.‎ A: 5_________________________________.‎ B: It’s a pleasure.‎ ‎ (6)‎ Kate: Hello! 1______________________?‎ Mrs Read: I’m sorry Ann isn’t here right now. 2____________________________?‎ Kate: This is Kate.‎ Mrs Read: She isn’t back yet. 3_______________________________________?‎ Kate: That’s very kind of you. I’m calling to ask her if she is free tomorrow. It’s March 12th, Tree Planting Day tomorrow. And 4___________________.‎ Mrs Read: I think she’ll be very glad to join you.‎ Kate: We’ll meet at the school gate at 7:00. 5_________________________.‎ Mrs Read: OK. I’ll let her know.‎ Kate: Many thanks. Goodbye.‎ Mrs Read: Goodbye.‎ ‎ (7)‎ A：Good afternoon. What can I do for you? B：I’d like to buy a washing machine. A：Well，1___________________________________.Some are made in China， and some are made in other countries. B：This one looks very nice. 2____________________________?‎ A：In Germany. B：3______________________________________?‎ A：Sure. You put the clothes in the machine， close the door and press this button. B：It’s easy. How much is it? A：4,000 yuan. B：Wow, that’s too expensive!4 _____________________. Do you have a cheaper one? A：How about this one? B：Oh，this one looks very good. And the price is OK.‎ ‎5___________________________________. ‎ (8)‎ ‎ (Two friends meet each other after May Day.) A：Nice to see you. B：1__________________________________________.‎ A：How did you spend May Day? B：2__________________________________________. A：Did you go to any other places? B：No. What about you? A: 3________________________________________________ I felt a bit sick then. B：Oh, what a pity!‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ ‎(1)1. How many times have you read it?‎ ‎2. Who wrote it?/ Who is the writer?‎ ‎3. So do I ./ Me, too.‎ ‎4. It’s exciting / wonderful / great.‎ ‎5. Is it far from here?‎ ‎(2)1. Shall we have something to eat?/ Let’s have something to eat, shall we?/ How about having something to eat?‎ ‎2. if / whether there is a restaurant near here?‎ ‎3. How far is it from here?‎ ‎4. What kind music do you like?‎ ‎5. Would you like to try?‎ ‎(3)1. Do you like cooking?‎ ‎2. Why do you have to cook this evening?‎ ‎3. Who cooks every day in your family?‎ ‎4. What will cook this evening?‎ ‎5. Enjoy your noodles!‎ ‎(4)1. Could I speak to Bruce, please?‎ ‎2. He’s not in at the moment.‎ ‎3. I’m not sure he would give me one or two.‎ ‎4. Has he got your telephone number?‎ ‎5. My telephone number has changed.‎ ‎(5)1. Where is it? / How can I get to it?‎ ‎2. How far is it (from here)?‎ ‎3. Which bus should I take?‎ ‎4. How long does it take me to get there?‎ ‎5. Thank you very much.‎ ‎(6)1. May I speak to Ann, please?‎ ‎2. Who’s that (speaking)?‎ ‎3. Can I take a message?‎ ‎4. we are going to plant trees.‎ ‎5. Please tell her to be there on time.‎ ‎(7)1. We have (There are) many different kinds of washing machines here.‎ ‎2. Where is it made?‎ ‎3. Can you show me how to use it？‎ ‎4. I can’t afford it.‎ ‎5. I’ll take it.‎ ‎(8)1. Nice to see you, too.‎ ‎2. I went to …‎ ‎3. I stayed at home all the time ‎（20）书面表达的考点集汇，讲解和训练 ‎ ‎ 二十、书面表达及其解题方法 ‎【考点扫描】‎ ‎ 书面表达是每年中考必考题型，是考查学生交际能力的一个重要组成部分。书面表达通常有三种形式：‎ ‎1、书信、日记、通知、留言、假条；‎ ‎2、看图作文；‎ ‎3、根据汉语提示作文。‎ ‎ 无论是那一种书面表达形式，考生所写的短文都要紧扣主题、文理通顺，要素完整，语言准确、得当、格式正确、无大、小写和拼写错误，标点符号正确，能达到交际目的。‎ ‎【名师解难】‎ 一. 训练方法 ‎1. 记。认真系统复习和背诵基础知识和优美的句子、句型。中国有句古话，叫“熟读唐诗三百首，不会吟诗也会作”。同样，要使自己具有较强的写作能力，首先应该熟读和背诵一些句型和短文。许多同学写出来的语言根本不符合英语的语言习惯，相当一部分人有对照中文逐字翻译的不良习惯，不去理会中英文的差异。大量的背诵和阅读是提高写作能力的有效办法，同学们若有大量的现成语言积累在脑海里，自己写起文段来，就可以做到脱口而出，或是模仿、套用，甚至发挥。‎ ‎2. 练。每练一篇书面表达题，都要真正学到一点东西，不可贪多而边学边忘。平时可以采用循序渐进、灵活多样的练习方式。从根据提示词写单句开始，到写单句，然后到写几句话，最后到写流利的文段。尽量尝试多种形式的写作，如短信、说明、通知、便条、明信片、看图写作、根据表格或记录写短文等。‎ ‎3. 写。要进行实战写作。要求自己在20分钟内写出100个词的短文，并且质量高、内容全、形式正确。这样形成习惯，考试时就能得心应手。 ‎ 二. 应试策略 ‎1. 审题目：要切中题意。《中考考试说明》指出，书面表达要切中题意。怎样才能切中题意？就是要认真审题，看到考题后，先不要急于动笔，要仔细看清题目要求的内容。在自己的头脑中构思出一个框架或画面，确定短文的中心思想，不要匆匆下笔，看懂题意，根据图画、图表、提纲或短文提供的资料和信息来审题。审题要审格式、体裁、人物关系、故事情节、主体时态、活动时间、地点等。‎ ‎2. 圈要点：防止遗漏要点。要点是给分的一个重要因素。为了防止写作过程中遗漏要点，同学们要充分发挥自己的观察力，把情景中给出的各个要点逐条列出。‎ ‎3. 列提纲：为写作做好准备。根据文章要点短文的中心思想将主要句型、关键词语记下，形成提纲。 ‎ ‎4. 定基调：定出时态、人称、顺序、开头、结尾。‎ ‎5. 写全文：写短文时要做到以下六个方面：‎ ‎(1)避免使用汉语式英语，尽量使用自己熟悉的句型。几种句型可交替使用，以避免重复和呆板。‎ ‎(2)多用简单句型，记事、写人一般都不需要复杂的句型。可适当多使用陈述句、一般疑问句、祈使句和感叹句。不用或少用非谓语或情态动词等较复杂的句型。‎ ‎(3)注意语法、句法知识的灵活运用。‎ ‎1）语态、时态要准确无误。‎ ‎2）主谓语要一致，主语的人称和数要和谓语一致。‎ ‎3）注意人称代词的宾格形式。‎ ‎4）注意冠词用法，例如： He is an honest student.中的an不能写成a。‎ ‎5）注意拼写、标点符号和大小写，例如：receive, believe, fourteen, forty, ninth, restaurant等。‎ ‎(4)描写人物时，要生动具体，例如：‎ ‎1）外表特征：tall, short, fat, thin, strong, weak, ordinary-looking 等。‎ ‎2）服饰颜色：red, yellow, blue, white, green, brown, black 等。‎ ‎3）内心境界：glad, happy, sad, excited, anxious, interested 等。‎ ‎4）感情描写：love, like, hate, feel, laugh, cry, smile, shout 等。‎ ‎5）动作描写：come, go, get, have, take, bring, fetch 等。‎ ‎(5)上下文要连贯。上下文的连贯性也是评分的一条原则，因此同学们应把写好的句子，根据故事情节，事情发生的先后次序（时间或空间），使用一些表示并列、递进等过渡词进行加工整理，使文章连贯、自然、流畅。同学们应注意下面过渡的用法：‎ ‎1）表示并列关系的：and, as well as, or… 2）表示转折关系的：but, yet, however… 3）表示时间关系的：when, while, after, before, then, after that… 4）表示因果关系的：so, therefore ,as a result… 5）表示目的的：in order to, in order that , so as to, so that… 6）表示列举的：for example , such as… 7）表示总结性的：in general, in all, in a word, generally speaking… ‎ ‎(6)不会表达，另辟蹊径。中考作文给分是以要点和语言准确度而定，不以文采打分。造句越简单准确越好，造复合句容易出错，容易被扣分，阅卷场上有句话：“错误面前人人平等，文采好不加分”。如遇到个别要点表达不出来或难以表达，可采用变通的办法，化难为易，化繁为简。总之，所造句子要正确、得体、符合英语表达习惯。‎ ‎(6)改病句：认真检查，改正错误。中考作文时，由于时间紧、内容多，同学们出错在所难免。因此，改错这一环节必不可少。中考作文评卷是根据要点、语言准确性、上下文的连贯性来给分，根据错误多少来扣分。因此，中考时花几分钟时间用来检查错误显得尤为重要。检查错误应从以下几个方面入手：‎ ‎1）格式是否有错。‎ ‎2）拼写有无错误。‎ ‎3）语言是否用错。‎ ‎4）时态、语态错误。‎ ‎5）标点错误。‎ ‎6）人称是否用错。‎ 三. 注意事项 书面表达要特别注意书写工整，卷面整洁。每年阅卷老师在十来天的时间里要看十几万考生的作文，工作量之大，时间之紧，可想而知。书写是否工整，卷面是否整洁与得分高低直接有关。‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎（2004年陕西省中考试题）‎ VII. 书面表达（共1题，计10分）‎ 假如你叫张强。请根据下面美国朋友Bob的来信内容，结合你自己的情况写一篇语言连惯、符合逻辑的英文回信。 要求：1. 认真阅读来信的内容，从中获得你需要的信息。 ‎2. 词数：80左右。回信的开头、结尾已给出，但不计入总词数。‎ 注意：回信中不得出现你的真实地址和所在学校的名称。 Dear friend, Hello！I’m your new friend. My name is Bob. I’m fifteen. I’m American. I live in New York. I am a middle school student. I’m good at maths. It is very interesting. My favourite sport is basketball. And I am not only a basketball fan but also a good player. I like pop music. My friends and I often sing pop songs together. After school, I am interested in getting on-line. I have known a lot about China from the Internet. Now I’m learning Chinese. I hope I will visit your country one day. Please write to me and tell me something about your life. I’m looking forward to hearing from you. Yours, Bob Dear Bob,‎ ‎_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ Yours,‎ ‎ Zhang Qiang ‎【解析】根据前面提到第六个步骤，我们来写一下这篇书面表达。‎ ‎1.审题目：通过审题目我们可以知道：本篇书面表达应是写一封回信，写信人是张强，收信人是Bob，信的内容应是介绍张强自己的情况。‎ ‎2. 圈要点：根据来信判断，写回信必须包括以下要点：1、收到对方的来信；2、愿意和对方交朋友；3、自己的姓名、年龄和住址；4、自己的身份、特长和爱好； 5、自己的希望。‎ ‎3、列提纲：1. got your letter 2. glad to be your friend 3. name, zhang Qiang, fifteen, live in Shaanxi 4. a middle school student, like English, like sports, good at drawing, 5. hope we’ll meet in China ‎ ‎4、定基调：1. 时态：收到来信用一般过去时，介绍情况用一般现在时，希望用一般将来时。2. 人称用第一人称。3.可按提纲的顺序来写。4. 开头和结尾题目已经给出。‎ ‎5、写全文：‎ Dear Bob,‎ ‎ I got your letter yesterday. I’m very glad to be your pen friend. My name is Zhang Qiang. I’m fifteen years old, too. I live in Shaanxi.‎ ‎ I’m a middle school student, too. I like English and physics very much. I also like sports, but I’m good at drawing. I know a little about America. Could you tell me something more about your country in your next letter?‎ I hope we’ll meet in China some day. I’m sure we’ll have a good time together.‎ Please write (to) me soon.‎ Yours,‎ Zhang Qiang ‎6、改病句：认真复查一边，如有错误，加以改正。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ ‎ （1）‎ 华山是中国名山之一。假设外国友人到你校参观后，准备去旅游。请根据以下 要点向外国友人简单介绍华山（the Hua Mountain）‎ ‎1．位于陕西东部，是中国著名的旅游胜地，每年有大批中外游客前去旅游观光。‎ ‎2．乘汽车去大约要花1个小时；也可以乘火车去。‎ ‎3．登山便可领略其云海（the sea of clouds）、奇松（wondrous pines）、怪石（unique ‎ rocks）等秀丽的风景及清晨美丽的日出。‎ 注意： ‎ ‎1．字数：80词左右。‎ ‎2．请不要逐字翻译。‎ ‎ （2）‎ 根据提示和要求完成下面短文 假如你（Li Lei）在去年夏令营认识的一个朋友Jim从英国给你寄来一件礼物—— 一件红色的衬衫，并附有一封信。在信中他向你问好，他想知道你近来在忙些什么。请你给他写一封回信（100个词左右）表示感谢。回信要包括以下内容：‎ ‎1. 向Jim问好并对他表示感谢。‎ ‎2. 礼物是你最喜欢的颜色，尺寸很合适，你非常喜欢。‎ ‎3. 告诉Jim你近来很好，上周刚过完生日，生日聚会很热闹。询问Jim的近况，并表示希望他能来中国。‎ 注意1. 信的格式已经给出。 ‎ ‎2. 信中不得使用真实的人名、地名。‎ ‎ （3）‎ 根据中文意思和英文提示词语，写出意思连贯、符合逻辑的英文文段。所给英文提示词语必须都用上，中文提示内容不必逐句翻译，每组英文提示所写出的句数不限。‎ 今天是‎6月23日星期日，天气晴朗。你和你的同学张宏参观了西安市动物园。那里的动物十分有趣，人见人爱。当你看到有位游客在向猴子投喂食物时，就上前阻止并说……‎ 请你用英文写一篇日记，记述今天的经历。（请注意日记格式）‎ ‎1．fine day, sun, bright ‎2．visit, Beijing Zoo ‎3．animal, so interesting, people, love ‎4．see, visitor, throw…to, stop, say ‎ （4）‎ 根据中文设置的情景、英文提示词语以及表格所提供的信息，写出语法正确、意思连贯、符合逻辑的英文文段。‎ 注意1. 字数60~80。 ‎ ‎2. 所给的英文提示词语及表格所提供的信息必须都用上。（可适当发挥）‎ ‎3. 发言稿的开头和结尾已给出。‎ 假设你是张斌，今年暑假你将参加学校组织的赴加拿大“绿色之旅”夏令营活动。请你准备一篇在开营式上的自我介绍发言稿。‎ ‎　　name, Zhang Bin, fifteen years old, live in Xi’an, favorite subject, biology…‎ Interest ‎ Free Time Activities ‎ Future Job ‎ Hope ‎ drawing ‎ go camping,‎ draw pictures of plants,‎ enjoy the singing of birds in nature ‎ biologist,‎ grow up ‎ good friends,‎ do one’s best,‎ make the earth… ‎ Dear friends I’m very glad to introduce myself to you._______________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________‎ That’s all. Thank you for listening.‎ ‎ （5）‎ ‎ 根据中文提示和英文提示词语写一篇短文。‎ ‎ 今年暑假，有一批美国中学生要来你们学校访问。请你写一篇有关西安的简介，以便和他们交流。‎ ‎ 注意：1.字数100左右； ‎ ‎ 2.必须使用所给英文提示。‎ Capital of Shaanxi,‎ Lie in the Northwest,‎ many places of interest,‎ autumn, best season ‎ （6）‎ 看图写话。‎  根据以上四幅图和提示词语，写出一篇语法正确、意思连贯、语句通顺、符合逻辑的短文，开头已给出。 要求：1. 叙述要用第三人称。 ‎2. 词数60~80个左右。 ‎3. 要表达自己的看法或想法。 ‎4. 选用下列词语：rush hour, cross, make sure, come over, traffic rules ‎ Last Monday, Tim got up at 7:‎40 in the morning. ‎_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎  （7）‎ 请你参考图文提示，写一篇60~80词的短文。 注意：1. 语言规范，语意完整，内容丰富。 ‎2. 表达符合图意，书写规范。 ‎3. 给出自己的观点。 ‎4. 文章的开头已给出。‎ 参考词：pollute, turn off the tap(水龙头)，dry, save(节约 vt.), water resources(水资源)‎ From the pictures we know that _______________________________________‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ （8）‎ 请根据下面四幅图，写一篇70个单词左右的短文。文章开头已经给出，不算入总词汇数内。‎ 参考词汇： on fire 着火firefighter n.消防员put out 灭火  Jack was woken up by the shouting “Fire! Help! Fire! Help!...” ‎_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ （9）‎ 看图写话。 要求：1. 根据图画所提供的语境，写出意思连贯、语言流畅、语法准确、符合逻辑的短文。 2. 至少使用两种时态，70词以上。不得使用真实姓名、地名、学校名。 ‎3. 标题和第一句已给出，但不计入70词之内。 TAKING CARE OF TREES One day Lin Tao and Mei Mei were playing in the garden.‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ （10）‎ 根据所给图画用英语写一篇约80词的短文。 ‎ (11)‎ 假如你所在的学校要出一期英语壁报。你准备就自己经历的一件事写一篇英语短文向壁报投稿。下面五幅图记录了你上个星期六与老师和同学到南河边参加植树活动的全过程。请你就以下五幅图写一篇英文短文。 注意：1. 短文内容要包括所有图画中的主要内容 ‎2. 词数：70～90 ‎3. 生词提示： 桶bucket锄头hoe ‎__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ （12）‎ 请按照下面6幅图和表格的提示，写一篇题为“Changes in Our Hometown”的英语短文。（词数：50~80，不包括已经给出的单词）‎  ‎ 内容要点： 过去 现在 旧房 高楼 河水污浊 河水清澈 步行、骑自行车 乘公交车、小汽车 Changes in Our Hometown Over the past ten years, great changes have taken place in our hometown. In the past,___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ ‎ (1)‎ 参考答案： ‎ ‎　　The Hua Mountain is one of the most famous mountains in China. It lies in the east of Shaanxi.  Every year thousands of Chinese and foreigners pay a visit there. It’s not far from here. It takes you about one hour to get there by bus. You can also go there by train. When you are at the top of the mountain, you’ll find clouds, wondrous pines and unique rocks around you. In the early morning when the sun rises, the sky looks very beautiful. It’s really a nice place to visit.‎ ‎ (2)‎ 参考答案：‎ ‎36 Zhonghua street Xi;an, China June21st, 2004‎ Dear Jim：‎ How are you? Many thanks for the shirt! I’m very happy to hear from you again. I love the shirt very much, Jim, and red is my favourite colour! You remembered! It’s just my size. Every time I wear it, I will think of you.‎ I’m fine here in China. Last week I had a birthday party. Many of my classmates came and my mother made us a lot of good food. We really had a wonderful time together. How are you doing in England, Jim? I miss you very much. I always miss the days we were together last summer. I hope you can come to China someday.‎ Please write back soon.‎ Your friend,‎ Li Lei (3)‎ 参考答案：‎ Sunday June 23rd ‎　　It was a fine day today and the sun was bright. I visited Xi’an Zoo with my classmate, Zhang Hong. The animals there were so interesting that all the people loved them. When I saw a visitor throwing food to the monkeys, I went/ran to stop him/her and said, “Animals are our friends and we must take good care of them.”‎ ‎ (4)‎ 参考答案：‎ Dear friends, ‎ ‎　　I’m very glad to introduce myself to you. My name is Zhang Bin. I’m fifteen years old. I live in Beijing. One of my favorite subjects is biology. I’m interested in drawing. In my free time, I often go camping, draw some pictures of plants, and enjoy the singing of birds in nature. I want to be a biologist when I grow up.‎ ‎　　I feel lucky to join you. I hope we can be good friends and do our best to make   That’s all. Thank you for listening. ‎ ‎ (5)‎ 参考答案：‎ ‎ Xi’an is the capital of Shaanxi with a long history. There are many places of interest, such as the Dayan Pagoda, the Xiaoyan Pagoda, the Bell Tower and the Terra Cotta Warriors. Since it lies in the Northwest of China, the winter here is long and it sometimes snows. Autumn is the best season in Xi’an, for it’s neither too cold nor too hot. One of the most famous traditional foods is “Yangroupao”. ‎ ‎ (6)‎ 参考答案：‎ Last Monday, Tim got up at 7:‎40 in the morning. It was the rush hour. He rode his bike to school very fast. He was crossing the street when a car came at that moment. Tim’s bike hit the car and he fell to the ground heavily. The driver was very kind and stopped to make sure that Tim was all right. Then a policeman came over. He told Tim to ride more slowly next time and it was dangerous. Tim thanked him and went to school. All of the young men should obey the traffic rules.‎ ‎ (7)‎ 参考答案：‎ From the pictures we know that much water has been polluted. Some factories are pouring waste water into rivers and lakes. The water becomes dirty and lots of fish have died. Many people often waste water. For example, they often forget to turn off the taps. If we don’t have enough water, land will be dry and crops will die. We can’t live without water. So we should try our best and encourage everyone to protect water resources. We must save water and stop polluting it. If we do that, Things will be much better.‎ ‎ (8)‎ 参考答案：‎ Jack was woken up by the shouting “Fire! Help! Fire! Help!...” What had happened? He looked out of the window. Wow! He found that his neighbour’s house was on fire. Jack jumped off the bed and rushed to the telephone. He made a call to the police. Then, he ran out and helped his neighbour (to) fight against the fire. Soon the fire fighters came and in a short time the fire was put out. And the house owner and fire fighters thanked Jack and his neighbours a lot. ‎ (9)‎ 参考答案：‎ TAKING CARE OF TREES One day Lin Tao and Mei Mei were playing in the garden. They found that a young tree there was dying. They thought they must save the young tree. Then they put a rope around the tree and watered it. Some days later the tree came back to life again. Their mother saw this and praised them, “You are good children!”‎ ‎ (10)‎ 参考答案：‎ Yesterday afternoon Li Ping and I were going to school. On the way we saw an old woman crossing the street. Suddenly a car passed by very fast. The old woman was frightened and fell down to the ground. The apples in her basket were all out on the street. Immediately, we ran to the old woman, helped her get up and picked up all the apples. Li Ping helped her carry the basket and I helped her cross the street. The old woman thanked us very much.‎ ‎ （11）‎ 参考答案：‎ 内容要点： ‎（1）上星期五老师告诉我们“明天去南河边植树”。 ‎（2）上星期六（第二天）早上六点半我就起床了。 ‎（3）我带着桶去学校，同学们带着桶、锄头在校门口等待。 ‎（4）到南河边，我们开始植树。（也可描写动场面。） ‎（5）看着新种下的树，我们都很高兴。 Last Friday, our teacher told us that we would go to plant trees by the South River the next day. On Saturday morning I got up at six thirty and went to school with a bucket. My classmates were waiting at the school gate with buckets and hoes. When we got to the South River, we began to plant trees on the river bank. (On the river bank, some students were digging holes, the others were planting or watering the young trees.) After we finished our work, we were happy to see the young trees we planted on the river bank.‎ ‎ （12）‎ 参考答案：‎ Over the past ten years, great changes have taken place in our hometown. In the past, the houses in our hometown were very poor, but now many people have moved into tall buildings (there are many tall buildings here and there). The water in the rivers was very dirty, but now the rivers are clean and people can swim in them. People used to walk or ride bikes, but now they can take buses or drive their own cars to go to work.‎